JP7785481B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Gaming machines that display variable information over short periods of time during a jackpot are known. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving mode that selects a variable display pattern with a short variable time.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-217007

The gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 had room for improvement in terms of using a variable display with a short fluctuation time.

This invention was made in light of the above situation, and aims to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(A) A gaming machine that can perform variable display based on the establishment of a start condition and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
a state control means capable of controlling the game to a normal state, the advantageous state, and a special state which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
A performance execution means;
a display means;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state in which the frequency at which the start condition is satisfied per unit time differs from that of the first special state,
the second special state has a higher frequency per unit time at which the start condition is satisfied than the normal state;
The effect identification information can be displayed on the display means,
When controlled to the second special state, a special variable display can be executed with a variable display period shorter than a pause period from the end of the variable display of the effect identification information to the start of the variable display of the next effect identification information,
The performance execution means
A display corresponding to the variable display, the display being capable of periodically changing in appearance, can be displayed on the display means;
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change performance that changes the state of the first special display in a predetermined direction can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change performance that changes the state of the second special display toward the predetermined direction can be executed,
The cycle at which the manner of the corresponding display changes can be made different when the vehicle is controlled to the first special state and when the vehicle is controlled to the second special state,
The period in which the state of the second special display in the second specific change performance changes can be made shorter than the period in which the state of the first special display in the first specific change performance changes,
The performance execution means
As the corresponding display, a plurality of types of corresponding displays can be displayed on the display means, including a first corresponding display, a second corresponding display that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first corresponding display, and a third corresponding display that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first corresponding display and the second corresponding display,
a change effect execution means for executing a change effect in which the corresponding display is displayed as the second corresponding display or the third corresponding display;
The change effect execution means
As the change effect, a first change effect that is executed with a specific action effect that acts on the corresponding display, and a second change effect that is executed without the specific action effect can be executed,
When controlled to the normal state, the first change performance and the second change performance can be executed,
When controlled to the second special state, the second change performance can be executed without executing the first change performance,
When controlled to the second special state, the second change performance can be executed in a period from before a change display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the change performance is started to immediately after the change display is started,
When controlled to the second special state, the second change performance can be executed in a later period that is immediately after the start of a variable display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the change performance,
When controlled in the second special state, the second change performance can be executed at a higher rate in the previous period than in the subsequent period,
The change performance can be executed in any one of a first change pattern, a second change pattern, and a third change pattern,
The first change pattern is a pattern in which the change performance is not performed in the previous period and the change performance is performed in the later period,
The second change pattern is a pattern in which the change performance is executed in the previous period and the change performance is not executed in the later period,
The third change pattern is a pattern in which the change performance is executed in both the previous period and the subsequent period,
When the final display mode of the correspondence display is the third correspondence display, the rate at which the third change pattern is executed is higher than the rate at which the first change pattern or the second change pattern is executed.
It is characterized by:
(1) A gaming machine that can perform variable display based on the establishment of a start condition and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
a state control means capable of controlling the game to a normal state, the advantageous state, and a special state which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
A performance execution means;
a display means;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state in which the frequency at which the start condition is satisfied per unit time differs from that of the first special state,
the second special state has a higher frequency per unit time at which the start condition is satisfied than the normal state;
The effect identification information can be displayed on the display means,
When controlled to the second special state, a special variable display can be executed with a variable display period shorter than a pause period from the end of the variable display of the effect identification information to the start of the variable display of the next effect identification information,
The performance execution means
A display corresponding to the variable display, the display being capable of periodically changing in appearance, can be displayed on the display means;
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change performance that changes the state of the first special display in a predetermined direction can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change performance that changes the state of the second special display toward the predetermined direction can be executed,
The cycle at which the manner of the corresponding display changes can be made different when the vehicle is controlled to the first special state and when the vehicle is controlled to the second special state,
The period in which the state of the second special display in the second specific change performance changes can be made shorter than the period in which the state of the first special display in the first specific change performance changes,
The performance execution means
As the corresponding display, a plurality of types of corresponding displays including a first corresponding display and a second corresponding display that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first corresponding display can be displayed on the display means,
a change effect execution means for executing a change effect in which the corresponding display is displayed as the second corresponding display;
The change effect execution means
As the change effect, a first change effect that is executed with a specific action effect that acts on the corresponding display, and a second change effect that is executed without the specific action effect can be executed,
When controlled to the normal state, the first change performance and the second change performance can be executed,
When controlled to the second special state, the second change performance can be executed without executing the first change performance,
When controlled to the second special state, the second change performance can be executed at a higher rate in a period from before the start of a variable display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the change performance to immediately after the start of the variable display, than in a period after immediately after the start of a variable display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the change performance.
It is characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, in the special state, it is possible to not freeze the decorative identification information when controlled to an advantageous state, so the flow of play from the variable display to the advantageous state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the advantageous state is emphasized, giving the impression that the advantageous state has been suddenly controlled.

The present invention may have only the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention, or it may have both the specific features of the invention set forth in the claims of the present invention and features other than those specific features.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the characteristic portion 152F. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a winning type table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 10 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the small win end processing. An explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for normal conditions. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a high-speed time-saving small win. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of effects related to entry fluctuation misses. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a missed entry variation. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of effects related to pseudo-variation misses. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a pseudo-variable miss. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a pseudo-variable miss. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a direct jackpot. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (Dream Rush). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (Dream Rush). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state (invincible rush). An explanatory diagram showing a control table after a win for each game state. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. This is a flowchart showing an example of small win end processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the variable display of decorative symbols in Dream Rush. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style relating to the first logo periodic change presentation, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style relating to the second logo periodic change presentation. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to the variable display of decorative symbols in the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH. FIG. 2 is a front view of the movable body, the logo panel, and the image display device. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the first change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the first change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the second change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to the second change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second pre-reading presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the presentation at the time of starting winning. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for active display, and FIGS. 10B1 and 10B2 are explanatory diagrams showing change pattern determination tables. (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing a change pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation mode determination table for change presentations. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first pre-reading effect, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the effects during a jackpot. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining the effects during a small win. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the effect when waiting for the start of a change. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining effects at the start of fluctuation. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the effects during fluctuation. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a normal jackpot of pattern 3R occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal jackpot with pattern 3R occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a time-saving jackpot occurs with pattern 10Ra. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a time-saving jackpot occurs with pattern 10Ra. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a time-saving jackpot occurs with pattern 10Ra. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation pattern when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a jackpot occurs, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3. This is a time chart showing the timing of the performance when a normal small win occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal small win occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal small win occurs. An explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between firing intervals and reserved consumption periods. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption periods, and second reserved memory counts. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption periods, and second reserved memory counts. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption periods, and second reserved memory counts.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that forms the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched into this gaming area by a predetermined ball launching device.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (to the right of the play area in the example shown in Figure 1), which perform a variable display (also called a special symbol game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. Special symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". Special symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. When special symbols or the normal symbols described below vary, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. When decorative symbols described below vary, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include the display of a certain symbol flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that variable display is sometimes referred to as variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also referred to as the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also referred to as the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a variable display of multiple types of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The synchronously executed special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The pending display and active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to a variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first hold memories using the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second hold memories using the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable ball entry device 6B (a standard electric device) forms a second start entry opening that changes between a closed and an open state due to the solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). The variable ball entry device 6B, for example, comprises an electric tulip-type device with a pair of movable wings. When the solenoid 81 is off, the movable wings are positioned vertically, bringing the tips of the movable wings close to the ball entry device 6A, creating a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the second start entry opening (also referred to as the second start entry opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is on, the movable wings of the variable ball entry device 6B are tilted, creating an open state in which game balls can enter the second start entry opening (also referred to as the second start entry opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out, and the second special game can be initiated. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices equipped with an electric tulip-type device.

General winning openings 10 are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, four locations at the bottom left and right of the game area), and are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 with a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large prize door closes the large prize door, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize door. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize door is in the on state, the large prize door opens the large prize door, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize door.

When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 14) are paid out as prize balls. When a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a gaming ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

When a game ball enters any of the prize slots, including the general prize slot 10, it is also referred to as a "win." In particular, a win at a start slot (first start slot, second start slot) is also referred to as a start slot.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming board 2 (to the left of the gaming area in the example shown in Figure 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and displays a variety of normal symbols as normal identification information that differs from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers from "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This type of variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, there is a normal symbol pending display 25C. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls as they flow down, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

A ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is operated by the player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position in the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a designated ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, which the player can press to issue a specific command. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 while the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on that passage cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on that passage is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed, the normal symbol display result will be "normal winning." On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the normal symbol display result will be "normal losing." When a "normal winning" occurs, opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if a game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when a special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or small win game state (a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the execution of the special game based on that entry will be suspended up to a specified upper limit (for example, 4).

In special symbol games, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot," and if a specific special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a small jackpot symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "small jackpot." Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot or small jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss."

After the display result in the special game becomes "big hit," the game state is controlled to a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit," the game state is controlled to a small hit game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can win prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is advantageous to the player. The more rounds played in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot slot (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, probability variable state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set accordingly. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, and jackpot types that offer few or no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 opens in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening opens in the same opening mode as the large prize game state for certain large win types (the number of times the large prize opening opens is the same as the number of rounds mentioned above, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large win types, small win types may also be set for "small wins."

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may enter a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning slot by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in a regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol).

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is implemented, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for players, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuations, but also makes it easier to win a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability variation state will continue until one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined number of special games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. A state in which the condition for the special game to end is played a predetermined number of times is also called a count-cut state (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability variation state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a gaming state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state that are advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability variable state. It is a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability that the displayed result in a normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the displayed result in a special game will be a "jackpot," is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified recovery process is not executed after power is turned on).

A state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and a state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state will not change, and the game state will continue to be controlled as it was before the special game display result became "small win" (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game for the specified number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the special game display result does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within the jackpot opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game state.

(Progression of Effects, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or add excitement to the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. Note that these effects are produced by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of these displays, they may also be produced by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 begin to display variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. When the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) in the first or second special symbol game is statically displayed, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also statically displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins to when it ends, the variable display of the decorative symbols may assume a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, as described below.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach mode is reached during the variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. Pachinko gaming machine 1 executes multiple types of reach effects, with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the effect mode. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot," a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is displayed stopped and aligned on a predetermined effective line in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line-up, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (regular jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line-up. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (regular symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "small win," a fixed decorative pattern (e.g., "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that form chance eyes are displayed stationary on predetermined effective lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be displayed when the display result of the special game is a "jackpot" for certain jackpot types (jackpot types in jackpot game states that are similar to small win game states) and when it is a "small win."

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may display a fixed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. Other effects, such as preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of decorative symbols. Preview effects include preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the currently executing variable display, and pre-read preview effects that predict the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). A pre-read preview effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode that is different from normal.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative symbols while they are being displayed in a variable manner, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo-consecutive effect that makes a single variable display appear as multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot gaming state, a jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot effect may include an effect announcing the number of rounds or an upgrade effect indicating that the value of the jackpot gaming state is increasing. Also, during a small jackpot gaming state, a small jackpot effect is executed to notify the player of the small jackpot gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether they are currently in a small jackpot gaming state or a jackpot gaming state by executing a common effect during a small jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (jackpot types in a jackpot gaming state similar to a small jackpot gaming state, for example, a jackpot type that sets the subsequent gaming state to a high-probability state). In such cases, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether they are currently in a small jackpot gaming state or a jackpot gaming state by executing a common effect after the end of the small jackpot gaming state and the end of the jackpot gaming state.

Also, for example, when a special game or the like is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), big win game status, small win game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in ROM 101 to control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) is used, and RAM 102 is used as the main memory. RAM 102 serves as backup RAM, where the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if part or all of the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or part of the program stored in ROM 101 may be deployed to RAM 102 and executed on RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specified computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals that control (drive) the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first hold display device 25A, second hold display device 25B, normal symbol hold display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches used to detect game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of its control of the game's progress, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the game's progress, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. These presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various decisions made by the main board 11 (e.g., the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later)), the game status (e.g., the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot slot, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, error notifications, and notifications of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes programs stored in ROM 121, and performs processing to execute performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). During this processing, various data (such as data from various tables) stored in ROM 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute an effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes presentations based on instructions to execute presentations from the presentation control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying the image display unit 5 with a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal that designates the lamp on/off state) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal that operates the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off of the lamp.

Note that the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to perform control of audio output, turning on/off of lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying signals to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (performance random numbers) used to execute various performances. The performance random numbers may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, sound control board 13, and lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main board 11)
First, we will explain the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in Figure 3, the CPU 103 first disables interrupts (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and making RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also sends a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). Upon receiving the presentation control command, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a screen on, for example, the image display device 5 to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (Step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in RAM 102 (backup RAM) (Step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or other reason (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes power supply interruption processing immediately before the machine becomes inoperable due to the power supply interruption. This power supply interruption processing includes processing to turn on a backup flag indicating that data is being backed up in RAM 102 and processing to protect data in RAM 102. The data protection processing includes adding error detection codes (checksums, parity bits, etc.) and backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including the status of various flags and various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In Step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and no backup data is stored in RAM 102 (Step S4; No), initialization processing (Step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (Step S4: Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (Step S5). In Step S5, it determines whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time of power outage, for example, using a parity bit or checksum. If it is determined that they match, it determines that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when power was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5: Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when power was stopped. During the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets up a working area based on the contents of RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when power was stopped, and if a special symbol was changing, the game control timer interrupt process, described below, is executed to resume the change of the special symbol from the state before recovery.

The CPU 103 then transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 instructing recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the currently playing special symbol game, may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, it sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time interval (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and enables the interrupt (step S12). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), allowing the CPU 103 to periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

After executing this game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 begins, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main error processing to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, if necessary, issue a warning based on the diagnosis results (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output processing to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and reservation of special symbol games, controls the big hit game state and small hit game state, and controls the game state (details will be described later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, it is possible to manage the execution and reservation of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), and to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a presentation control command to be sent during each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the presentation control command that has been set to be sent is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the presentation control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

The start winning determination process detects the occurrence of a start winning, stores pending information in a specified area of RAM 102, and updates the number of pending memories. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and variation pattern, and this is stored as pending information. A process may also be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the pending information and number of pending memories are stored, transmission settings are made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the determination results, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories, and the predictive determination. The performance control command thus transmitted and set for the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in Figure 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag stored in RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to transmit the effect control commands corresponding to each step to the effect control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). This normal special symbol processing determines whether to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines (predetermines) whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or a "small jackpot," and if a "jackpot" is selected, the type of jackpot, based on a random number value used to determine the display result, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, the normal special symbol processing determines a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol, a small jackpot symbol, or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game in accordance with the determined display result. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "1," and the normal special symbol processing ends. The special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also known as special symbol 2 priority consumption). Additionally, the order in which game balls enter the first and second starting winning slots may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which they enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision value compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern to determine one of several types of fluctuation pattern based on the results of a pre-determined decision on whether the display result will be a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes processes for making settings to change the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and for measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol began to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3." This special symbol stop process includes settings to stop the variation of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and to stop and display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that results in the display of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4." On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8." If the display result is a "miss," the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0." If the display result is a "small hit" or "miss," the game state is also updated if the game is in a time-saving state or a special probability state and the end of the number-cutting period is confirmed. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-jackpot opening process in step S114 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "4." This pre-jackpot opening process includes processing to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and set the large prize opening to an open state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot." When the large prize opening is set to an open state, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door. At this time, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be set and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set, depending on, for example, the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5," and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "5." This jackpot opening process includes processes such as measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the large prize opening is to be returned to a closed state, processes such as stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door are executed, and then the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "6," and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6." This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of rounds that open the large prize slot has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5." However, if the number of rounds executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7." Once the value of the special symbol process flag has been updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7." This jackpot end process includes processes such as waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation, which serves as a presentation operation to notify players of the end of the jackpot game state, has elapsed, and making various settings to initiate variable rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0," and the jackpot end process ends.

The pre-processing for opening a small win in step S118 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "8." This pre-processing for opening a small win includes processing to set the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win." At this time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9," and the pre-processing for opening a small win ends.

The small win opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes processes for measuring the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "10", and the small win opening process ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "10." This small win end process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation announcing the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 prior to the small win game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0," and the small win end process ends.

(Major operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 6. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting registers for the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. It also executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the register settings of the CTC. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns on. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 automatically disables the interrupt. However, if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable command (DI command). In response to the interrupt due to the performance control INT signal turning on, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a specified command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, the performance control command is captured from a specified input port included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The captured performance control command is stored in a performance control command reception buffer, for example, provided in RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then enables interrupts and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 may be turned on, so that the effect control process process can confirm which effect control command was received and the content specified by the effect control command. Furthermore, if the effect control command specifies the game status, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game status.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). The performance control process controls the operation of various performance devices, such as the display of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving of the movable body 32. In addition, the control content of performance operations using the various performance devices is judged, determined, and set in accordance with the performance control commands sent from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 is updated by software. Then, processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading notice performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processing steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of a performance process flag stored in RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various effects such as reach effects and various preview effects will be executed, their mode, and the start timing of execution are determined based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) that reflects the determined results is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing of step S172 is executed when the effect process flag value is "2." In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs in response to a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 displays the fixed decorative pattern, which is the result of the display of the decorative pattern, in a static state, for example, in response to reading an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the effect control pattern or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the static display of the fixed decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a static state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3" and the variable display effect processing ends.

The special symbol win wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3." During this special symbol win wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a presentation control command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big hit game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6." On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small hit game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4," which corresponds to the small hit presentation process. Furthermore, if a command specifying the start of a big hit game state or a small hit game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, the display result in the special symbol game is determined to be a "miss," and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to its initial value of "0." Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process will end.

The small win presentation processing in step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the small win gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the small win gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation processing is terminated.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the small win end presentation process is terminated.

The jackpot presentation processing of step S176 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "6." In this jackpot presentation processing, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern, etc., corresponding to the presentation content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. Furthermore, in the jackpot presentation processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the end of the jackpot gaming state, the value of the presentation control process flag is updated to "7," which corresponds to the ending presentation processing, and the jackpot presentation processing ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. The presentation process flag value is then updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variations of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol showing "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing that symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, that symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not show the symbol showing "-").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 via a removable recording medium, but may also be distributed by being pre-installed on a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communications processing unit, the programs and data for realizing the present invention may also be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communications line, etc.

Games can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line, temporarily storing them in internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game can also be executed by exchanging data with another computer device via a network.

In this specification, expressions used to compare various percentages, such as the execution rate of effects (such as "high," "low," and "different") may include cases where one is a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes cases where one is a "0%" percentage and the other is a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%."

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 152F)
Next, the characteristic section 152F of this embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic section 152F, a technology targeted at a pachinko gaming machine in which a setting value with different degrees of advantage for a player, such as the probability of winning a jackpot, can be set by a setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also functions as a setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for a player as the setting value for the probability of winning a jackpot.

First, let's explain the setting values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in this example is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed according to the setting values by a person at the gaming facility (such as a gaming facility staff member) using a predetermined switch or other operating means to change the settings.

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) executes a setting change process that allows the jackpot probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. This executes a setting change process that allows the jackpot probability to be changed by using a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value during the normal special symbol processing of the special symbol process processing. The setting value consists of six levels (multiple levels), for example, from 1 to 6, with the jackpot probability increasing in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. In other words, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the player is least advantageous, and the advantageous level increases in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Note that the setting value need only be multiple levels, and is not limited to six levels. In this way, since the payout rate (number of balls paid out per unit time (number of winning balls)) changes depending on whether the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed, changing the setting value can also be said to change the payout rate.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six setting values, setting values 4 to 6, for example, are sometimes called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, are sometimes called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

In addition, the probability of selecting a jackpot type may be changed by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern type may be changed by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern may be changed by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding feature section 152F, in a pachinko gaming machine that can set one of multiple setting values, when the machine is in a jackpot gaming state, a series of reserved hits may be executed in which reserved information determined to be controlled to a hit (jackpot or small hit) is stored in RAM 122, which serves as a reserve memory buffer. Specifically, a reserved hit series refers to consecutive hits within a range of reserved information in which the reserved information existing at the time of a jackpot occurrence contains reserved information that will result in a hit in the future, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the next hits occur consecutively within the range of reserved information that existed at the time of the jackpot occurrence (a series of reserved hits within a reserved hit). In the case of a small hit, a jackpot occurs via a small hit based on the occurrence of a V win, so the reserved information for the small hit can be considered reserved memory information for a hit that will result in a jackpot in the future. When such a reserved hit series is executed, a notification effect may be executed to notify the player that a series of reserved hits has occurred.

Figure 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in characteristic section 152F. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in characteristic section 152F, the reference numerals and descriptions for components similar to those in the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in Figure 1 will be omitted, and only the differences will be described.

In the game area where the game balls can flow down after being thrown, a first path of the game balls' flow paths is provided mainly in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path of the game balls' flow paths, which is different from the first path, is provided mainly in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make it flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make it flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may also be called the left hit path. Furthermore, the second path is a path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may also be called the right hit path.

The first and second paths may be separate paths, or may share a portion of the path. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the edge of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play pins within the play area.

When a gaming ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the gaming area, if it is guided to the left gaming area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right gaming area. Furthermore, when a gaming ball is guided to the right gaming area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of gaming pins, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left gaming area.

A winning ball device 6A with a first start winning hole is provided as a structure through which game balls hit into the left game area of the game area can enter. The winning ball device 6A is located below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first start winning hole switch 22A for detecting game balls that have entered the first start winning hole.

The structures through which game balls hit into the right play area of the play area can enter are the passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the V-determined winning device 87. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second start winning port through which game balls can enter. Additionally, switches for detecting game balls that enter each port are provided: a gate switch 21 inside the passing gate 41, a second start winning port switch 22B inside the second start winning port, and a V-entry switch 87a, a V-determined winning switch 15a, and a V-determined discharge switch 15b inside the V-determined winning device 87.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball will be guided to the first start entry port of the entry port structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the first start entry port, the player simply hits the game ball to the left. In the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball will be guided to the second start entry port of the entry port structure and passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the second start entry port and passing gate 41, the player simply hits the game ball to the right.

The passing gate 41 is a gate structure through which a gaming ball can enter (pass). When a gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol will be described later. In the left gaming area, gaming pegs are planted so that the gaming ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the gaming ball enter the first start winning hole, the player simply hits the gaming ball to the left. In the right gaming area, gaming pegs are planted so that the gaming ball is guided to the second start winning hole of the winning hole structure and the passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the gaming ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player simply hits the gaming ball to the right.

The V-determining winning device 87 is a device that determines whether the game ball has entered the V-shaped zone, which is a condition for generating a big win when a small win occurs.

The V-determined winning device 87 is made of a transparent material, allowing the player to see the game balls passing through it. The V-determined winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows the game balls to pass through in both the front and back directions, and walls are provided on both sides (the front and back sides) of a passageway that slopes from right to left and extends left and right, forming a guide path along which the game balls are guided. In the center of the guide path, an operating port is formed as an opening that repeatedly opens and closes over a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 second x 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + 1 second end period) when a small win occurs, allowing a total of approximately 10 or more game balls to enter during the predetermined open period. The passageway for the game ball in the V-determined winning device 87 is provided with multiple protrusions that protrude alternately from both sides of the wall as deceleration means for slowing down the game ball being guided. This creates a structure (hereinafter referred to as the deceleration structure) that allows the game ball to flow slowly through the passageway above the operating port at the top of the V-determined winning device 87 when hit from the right.

In the small win game state, the opening control of the V-determination winning device 87 is executed for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-determination winning device 87 is detected, or until a predetermined period of time has passed. In the V-determination winning device 87, the portion of the guideway where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called the fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 that can move back and forth above the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided along the guide path from the right end to the left end, dropping from the left end. When the operating port is open due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens on the guide path, allowing the game ball guided along the guide path to drop from the operating port into the interior of the V-determination winning device 87.

Inside the V-determined winning device 87 (operating port), a specific V-winning area 870 is provided in the center of the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-determined winning device 87 as a winning area where game balls entering through the operating port can win. Furthermore, a ramp is provided that guides all game balls entering through the operating port onto the V-winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V-winning area 870 has a V-winning port through which game balls can enter, and is capable of guiding game balls entering through the V-winning port downward.

A plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) is provided at the top end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of V winning area 870, which can switch V winning area 870 between an open and closed state. The opening/closing member is driven by solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close V winning opening. When the opening/closing member opens the V winning opening, game balls guided onto V winning area 870 can fall into V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member closes the V winning opening, game balls guided onto V winning area 870 pass over the opening/closing member and are arranged to open near the downstream side of V winning area 870, allowing them to fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide game balls downward.

Specifically, the V entry area 870 of the V-determination entry device 87 is basically open. During a small win game state in which the operating port of the V-determination entry device 87 is open, when a game ball enters the V entry area 870 and enters, the game ball is detected by the V entry switch 87a provided in the V entry area 870. During a small win game state, when a game ball is detected by the V entry switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to a closed state, and game balls subsequently guided onto the V entry area 870 enter the winning ball area. Game balls that enter the winning ball area are detected by the V-determination entry switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, of the game balls that enter the V-determination entry device 87, one game ball is detected by the V entry switch 87a, and subsequent game balls are detected by the V-determination entry switch 15a.

When the V-determination winning device 87 is open during a small win game, its operating port closes and game balls cannot enter when the total number of balls detected by the V-determination winning switch 87a and the V-determination winning switch 15a reaches 10. The V-determination winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge below, and game balls that enter the V-determination winning device 87 via this merged discharge passage are discharged into a designated discharge path inside the game board 2. The discharge passage is equipped with a V-determination discharge switch 15b that can detect discharged game balls, and this switch detects all discharged game balls.

When a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period, the conditions for a big win are met, and the machine is controlled to a big win game state. Such a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 is called a V-winning. As mentioned above, the pachinko game machine 1 is structurally and controllably designed to allow an average of approximately 10 game balls to enter the V-determination winning device 87 without requiring any special operation during the period when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened. Furthermore, the structure is designed so that when a game ball is allowed to enter the V-determination winning device 87, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V-winning area 870. Additionally, when a small win occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a right-hit promotion notification is issued to instruct the player to hit to the right, so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-determination winning device 87.

Therefore, when a small win occurs, unless the player does not fire the game ball while the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is open, or the player hits with the left, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V-winning area 870 and a big win will occur if the player hits with the right.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the V-determination winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure. However, instead of providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port that allows game balls to drop into part of the game ball guide path in the V-determination winning device 87 may be provided, and the operating port may be opened 10 times to allow approximately 10 game balls to enter the V-winning area 870 during the small win game state.

In the right play area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determined winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter these variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determined winning device 87, the player simply hits the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to potentially enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V-determined winning device 87, but from the standpoint of gameplay, it is desirable that this possibility be extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering either of these devices.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the play area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, game balls hit to the right are guided by game pins planted in the right play area. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that game balls cannot enter from the left play area due to the state of the game pins planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered by a rectangular door. When a jackpot occurs, a solenoid causes the door to tilt forward around its base, revealing (opening) the large winning opening. A count switch 23 for detecting entering game balls is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. The winning route for the special variable winning ball device 7 is restricted by game pegs and other structures so that game balls can only enter the large winning opening if they are hit into the right game area. However, it may also be possible for game balls to enter the large winning opening regardless of whether they are hit into the left game area or the right game area.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a gaming ball entering the first starting winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a gaming ball entering the second starting winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A jackpot can also occur if a game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 when the operating port is open due to a small win game state enters the V-winning area 870. Hereinafter, a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 and being detected by the V-winning switch 87a will be referred to as a V-winning. A small win is a win that opens the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 as a predetermined value, and a jackpot can occur provided that a V-winning occurs. In the V-judgment winning device 87, the game state in which the operating port opens is called a "small win game state." A jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the V-winning area during a small win game state is called a "jackpot via a small win." In contrast, a jackpot game state that is entered based on the display result of the special pattern variable display by the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is called a "jackpot due to a special pattern."

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value is awarded, and a repeat continuation control is performed in which the special variable prize ball device 7 repeatedly switches between an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable prize ball device 7 is open (the large prize opening is open) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the open state, and then set to the closed state when a predetermined condition for ending the open state is met (either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10) have been generated). When the condition for ending the open state is met, a continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times the device is opened in the jackpot gaming state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (the final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or second special symbol begins when the first start condition (first execution condition) or second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition for the variable display, is met (for example, when the gaming ball passes through the first start entry slot or second start entry slot (including winning) as the start entry area), and then when the variable display start condition (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and second special symbol is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being played) is met. After the variable display time (variation time) has elapsed, the display result (stopped symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the gaming ball passing through refers to the gaming ball passing through an area that has been pre-determined as a winning area, such as a prize slot or gate, and is a concept that includes the gaming ball entering the prize slot (winning). Furthermore, deriving and displaying the display result refers to the final stopped display (confirmed display) of the symbol (an example of identification information).

In addition, for variable displays where the game ball has entered a start area such as the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot but the start conditions have not yet been met, storing information about variable displays where the start conditions have not yet been met within a specified upper limit is called reserved memory. The term reserved memory is also used to indicate (identify) the reserved information. Reserved memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the first reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning slot. For the second special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the second reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start winning slot. If a jackpot occurs when such a first reserved memory or second reserved memory exists, the reserved memory that existed before the jackpot occurs is maintained as is and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state ends.

When a second start win occurs in the second start win slot, even if there is a pending memory of a first start win, the variable display of the second special symbol based on that second start win takes priority. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol takes priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, there is a second reserve display device 25B consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning slot, i.e., the second reserve memory number. The second reserve display device 25B increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And each time the variable display on the second special pattern display device 4B begins, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

Further above the second reserve display 25B is the first reserve display 25A, which consists of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning slot, i.e., the first reserve memory number. The first reserve display 25A increases the number of lit displays by one each time a valid start winning occurs. And, each time a variable display is started on the first special pattern display device 4A, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

In pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state and presentation state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a variety of gameplay experiences by firing game balls in either a "left hit" aimed at the left game area or a "right hit" aimed at the right game area depending on the game situation. The following explains the flow of gameplay once the player starts playing on pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a player sits down at the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts playing for the first time, they first play by hitting the ball from the left so that the gaming ball will enter the first starting winning slot. Then, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot due to a special symbol), they switch from hitting the ball from the left to hitting the ball from the right, and play by aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens. After the jackpot gaming state ends, a right-hit promotion notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, encouraging the player to play by hitting the ball from the right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot gaming state, the player plays by hitting the ball with the right hand, aiming at the opened special variable winning ball device 7. During the jackpot gaming state, a right-hand hit promotion notification is issued. After the jackpot gaming state ends, if the time-saving state described below is entered, the player continues playing by hitting the ball with the right hand. After the jackpot gaming state ends, if the time-saving state is entered, a time-saving notification is issued on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state will begin. In addition, during the time-saving state, a right-hand hit promotion notification is also issued. If the time-saving state is not entered after the jackpot gaming state ends, the right-hand hit promotion notification executed during the jackpot gaming state ends, and the player switches from hitting the ball with the right hand to hitting the ball with the left hand, and the player plays to win the first starting winning slot. Note that if the time-saving state is not entered, a left-hand hit promotion notification (also called a left-hand hit notification) may be issued on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to switch back to hitting the ball with the left hand.

During the time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game, right-hand hits are used to aim for the variable winning ball device 6B, which has the second start winning port. If a game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result shows a jackpot (a jackpot with a special pattern), right-hand hits are used to aim for the special variable winning ball device 7 and play continues. Also, if a game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result shows a small win, the operating port of the V-determined winning device 87 is opened in the small win game state, so right-hand hits are used to aim for the V-determined winning device 87 and play continues. At the start of the small win game state, a small win start notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has begun. Additionally, when controlled to a small win game state, a right-hit promotion notification is also issued at a specific timing (depending on the game situation, at the start of the small win display that is executed before the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened in response to a small win, or at a specified timing before the small win display is executed).

When the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is open due to the small win game state, a game ball falls from the operating port into the V-determining winning device 87, enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected, resulting in a V-winning, and a big win via a small win occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V-winning has occurred. Furthermore, when the small win game state ends, a small win end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the small win ends, the game enters the big win game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, so the player continues to play by hitting the ball to the right, aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7.

Furthermore, when playing in a small win gaming state, aiming for the V-determining winning device 87, if the gaming ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, no big win will occur. When a V winning does not occur during the small win gaming state, a V winning failure notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Furthermore, when the small win gaming state ends, a small win end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win gaming state has ended. Then, after the small win gaming state ends, while the time-saving state continues, the player continues to play by hitting with the right hand, aiming for the variable winning ball device 6B. When the time-saving state ends, the player switches from hitting with the right hand to hitting with the left hand and plays to have the gaming ball win the first starting winning slot. When the time-saving state ends, a time-saving end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended, and a left-hit promotion notification is displayed to encourage the player to return to left-hitting and continue playing.

Figure 8-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The hit type table shows, for each hit type, the conditions for a jackpot to occur, the control state (game state) after a jackpot, the number of times the ball opens during a jackpot (number of rounds), and the opening time for each round during a jackpot. In this embodiment, the jackpot types include a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small hit, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small hit, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small hit. The number in parentheses for a jackpot via a small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball enters the second start entry port provided in the variable ball entry device 6B and the second special symbol is displayed as a small win symbol. Whether the special symbol is displayed as a small win symbol is determined in advance by random number lottery (special symbol small win determination). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating port of the V-determining entry device 87 opens in an opening pattern of 10 openings and a 0.1-second opening time. The game control state after the small win game state ends (the big win probability, small win probability, and base, described below) is the same as before the small win. In a small win, prize balls are paid out for game balls that enter the V entry area 870 in the V-determining entry device 87 during the small win game state. Approximately 10 winning balls can be generated during the small win game state, and approximately 30 prize balls can be paid out depending on the winning balls.

When a game ball enters the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 while the operating port is open and the game ball enters the V-entry area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V entry), a jackpot occurs. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a small win via jackpot. Small win via jackpots include 16 (15)R time-saving jackpots via small wins, 9 (8)R time-saving jackpots via small wins, and 5 (4)R time-saving jackpots via small wins, which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. A small win that is linked to have the potential to become a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. A small win that is linked to have the potential to become a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot is called a second small win. A small win that is linked to have the potential to become a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot is called a third small win.

On the other hand, jackpots that occur directly from the variable display of special symbols, without going through a minor jackpot, are called pattern jackpots. Examples of pattern jackpots include the 15R pattern time-saving jackpot, which occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and the 4R pattern time-saving jackpot.

As such, jackpots include symbol jackpots that occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and small jackpots that occur by V entry via a small jackpot based on the variable display of the second special symbol. Both symbol jackpots and small jackpots are jackpots that are controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and are called time-saving jackpots. In this embodiment, advantageous states that are advantageous to the player also include the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

A 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R). A 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened four times (4R). A 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the winning device opens for 16 rounds, the large prize opening is actually opened only 15 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as a 15R time-saving jackpot. A 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via a small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning slot opens 8 times (8R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. A 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via a small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning slot opens 4 times (4R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. Although the winning device opens for 5 rounds, the large winning slot actually opens only 4 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning slot is the same type of jackpot as a 4R time-saving jackpot with a pattern.

The time-saving state after a 4R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one where the second special symbol changes display once, and one where the total number of times the first and second special symbols change display is five. The number of times the time-saving end condition of the second special symbol changing display once is set taking into account that a 100% probability of a game ball entering the V-determining winning device 87 will enter the V-winning area 870. When the second special symbol changes display, a small win occurs at a rate of approximately 1/7. Therefore, the end condition of the second special symbol changing display once is set to the number of times that a jackpot via a small win can occur when the second special symbol changes display.

The time-saving termination condition of one variable display of the second special symbol is set for the following reason. In the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) generally continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once. However, to display the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-hand hit is required to cause the game ball to enter the passage gate 41, opening the variable winning ball device 6B, and then allowing the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It can take time for the game ball to enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the reserved first special symbol may be displayed first.

Therefore, the termination condition of five total times the first and second special symbols are displayed is a condition that ensures that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, begins immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, based on reserved memory that can store up to four first special symbols before the jackpot game state. This prevents the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, from being canceled during the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol, which is likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, beginning based on reserved memory that is based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

After a jackpot other than a 4R time-saving jackpot, two end states are set: one where the second special symbol is displayed seven times, and one where the first and second special symbols are displayed 11 times in total. The seven-time end condition for the time-saving state is set taking into account that a 100% probability of a game ball entering the V-determining winning device 87 will enter the V-winning area 870. When the second special symbol is displayed, a small win occurs at a rate of approximately 1/7. Therefore, the end condition of seven times the second special symbol is displayed is set so that when the second special symbol is displayed, the probability of a small win occurring is significantly higher than in a 4R time-saving jackpot. This draws the player's attention to the occurrence of a small win and increases the player's anticipation for a small win occurring.

The termination condition of 11 total times the first and second special symbols are displayed is to ensure that even if the display of the first special symbol based on reserved memory (up to four can be stored before the jackpot game state) begins immediately after the start of the time-saving mode, before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, the display of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, for seven times can still be displayed. This prevents a decrease in the number of times the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be displayed during the time-saving mode, even if the display of the first special symbol based on reserved memory (based on the first start winning) begins immediately after the start of the time-saving mode and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is configured to allow entry from the first path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the first path in terms of starting the winning than if the game ball flowed down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens is configured to allow entry from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path in terms of winning in the event of a jackpot than if the game ball flowed down the first path. Also, in a specific state such as a small jackpot game state, the V-determining winning device 87 that opens is configured to allow entry from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball flowed down the first path.

In addition to this comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning)) are provided on the first and second paths, and in the normal low base state, it is easier for the first path to result in a winning entry into that variable winning port, and in other states such as the high base state, big win game state, and small win game state, it is easier for the second path to result in a winning entry into that variable winning port than the first path, such that in the normal state it is more advantageous for the player for the gaming medium to flow down the first path, and in other game states it is more advantageous for the player for the gaming medium to flow down the second path.

Figure 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Figure 8-3 shows the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows:

(1) Random R: A random counter used to determine whether a jackpot or a small jackpot will occur. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, incrementing from 0 until it reaches its upper limit of 65,535, and then incrementing again from 0. (2) Random 1: Determines the type of jackpot (one of the following types: 15R time-saving jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot, 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, and 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot) and the jackpot symbol (for determining the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol). (3) Random 2: Determines the type (type) of fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3: Determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4: Determines whether or not a win based on a normal symbol will occur (for determining whether a normal symbol will win). (6) Random 5: Determines the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the specific game state jackpots include multiple types: a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot or a small jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), the jackpot type is determined to be one of these jackpot types based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (Random 1). However, in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, the determined jackpot is invalid unless a V win occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (Random 1). Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Additionally, when a small win type is determined, the small win symbol is also determined at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number used to determine the small win symbol.

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is first determined using a fluctuation pattern type determination random number (Random 2), and then one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type is determined using a fluctuation pattern determination random number (Random 3). In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation mode. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns are classified into normal fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that do not involve a reach, and reach fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that involve a reach.

Figure 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table, the second special symbol hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

Figure 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. The "probability" shown in Figure 8-4(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

The probability of winning the first special symbol varies depending on the setting. It is 1/199 for setting 1, 1/190 for setting 2, 1/180 for setting 3, 1/170 for setting 4, 1/160 for setting 5, and 1/150 for setting 6. Therefore, the probability of winning increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

Figure 8-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining big hits and small hits for the second special symbol, and is a table in which big hit determination values and small hit determination values that are compared with random R are set. The top row in Figure 8-4(B) is the big hit determination table section, and the bottom row in Figure 8-4(B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the top row of Figure 8-4(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row of Figure 8-4(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

The probability of a jackpot for the second special symbol varies depending on the setting value. It is 1/199 for setting 1, 1/190 for setting 2, 1/180 for setting 3, 1/170 for setting 4, 1/160 for setting 5, and 1/150 for setting 6. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. In contrast, the probability of a small jackpot for the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. A small jackpot may also be set for the first special symbol. In such cases, it is desirable to make the probability of a small jackpot for the first special symbol lower than for the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small jackpot for the first special symbol could be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry slot (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry slot (second start winning entry), it samples the count value (random R) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the first special symbol hit determination table. If the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it determines that a jackpot has occurred for the first special symbol. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the second special symbol hit determination table. If the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it determines that a jackpot has occurred for the second special symbol. If the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, it compares the extracted value with the small jackpot determination values set in the second special symbol hit determination table. If the extracted value matches any of the small jackpot determination values, it determines that a small jackpot has occurred for the second special symbol. Deciding to make it a small hit also means provisionally deciding to make it a big hit via a small hit (it is written as provisionally decided because if no V entry occurs during the small hit, it will not be controlled as a big hit).

Determining whether to have a big win or not means determining whether to transition to a big win gaming state, but also determining whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or second special pattern the big win pattern. Determining whether to have a small win or not means determining whether to transition to a small win gaming state, but also determining whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern the small win pattern.

Figures 8-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables stored in ROM 101. Figure 8-4 (C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on a first special symbol. Figure 8-4 (D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on a second special symbol.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (C) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and is set with a jackpot determination value corresponding to each of the "15R time-saving jackpot" and "4R time-saving jackpot." The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (D) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and is set with a jackpot determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving jackpot."

Also, as shown in Figures 8-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (jackpot pattern determination value) that determines the jackpot patterns for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the determination value corresponding to an "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a determination value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3." The determination value corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a determination value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7."

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type.

The small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (E) contains numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2 for determining the jackpot type, and sets jackpot determination values corresponding to "16 (15) R time-shortened jackpot via small hit," "9 (8) R time-shortened jackpot via small hit," and "5 (4) R time-shortened jackpot via small hit." However, the jackpot types determined by the small hit via jackpot type determination table are provisional jackpot types linked to the first small hit (which will result in a 16 (15) R time-shortened jackpot), the second small hit (which will result in a 9 (8) R time-shortened jackpot), and the third small hit (which will result in a 5 (4) R time-shortened jackpot), respectively, and are invalid if no V win occurs during small hit gameplay.

Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of a presentation control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100. Figures 8-5 and 8-6 show the relationship between specific command data for a presentation control command and the command name and command specification. As shown in Figures 8-5 and 8-6, the game control microcomputer 100 sends various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 depending on the game control status.

The main commands in Figures 8-5 and 8-6 will be explained below. Command 80XX (H) is a presentation control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern to be displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. The presentation control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the presentation control CPU 120 receives command 80XX (H), it controls the presentation display device to start a presentation that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C06(H) are display result specification commands that show display results including miss display results, jackpot type, jackpot display results for each small jackpot type, and small jackpot display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol change command that indicates the start of the first special symbol change display. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol change command that indicates the start of the second special symbol change display. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation command that indicates the end of the change of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are jackpot start specification commands that specify the start of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A1XX (H) is a command specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command specifying when the large prize opening is closed, indicating that the large prize opening has been opened for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are jackpot end specification commands that specify the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command A402(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that specifies that the game state is normal (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is first time-saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is second time-saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved memory number specification command that specifies the first reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved memory number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved memory number specification command that specifies the second reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the number of reserved memories, it sends a reserved memory number designation command that specifies the number of reserved memories after subtraction. However, this is not limited to this, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command that specifies that the number of reserved memories should be subtracted by 1 for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may also be used.

Commands C2XX(H) and C3XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, and fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a ball is initially won into the first or second starting winning slot. Of these, command C2XX(H) is a pattern designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not it will be a jackpot or a small jackpot, and the type of jackpot. Furthermore, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result (fluctuation pattern type judgment result) of which range of judgment values the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls within, among the winning judgment results.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning specification command that specifies that a V winning has occurred. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection specification command that specifies that a winning ball (including both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) has been detected in the V determination winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, a first reserved memory buffer is provided in RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the first special symbol. The first reserved memory buffer has a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example). The first reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the jackpot type (Random 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (Random 2), and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (Random 3).

For the second special symbol, RAM 102 is provided with a second reserved memory buffer for storing reserved memory information for the second special symbol. The second reserved memory buffer has a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second reserved memory number (4 in this example). The second reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the jackpot type (Random 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (Random 2), and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (Random 3).

Based on a win at the first start winning slot, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the first start winning slot, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved memory buffer. Furthermore, based on a win at the second start winning slot, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the second start winning slot, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserved memory buffer.

In this way, storing information about the start winning in the reserved memory buffer may be referred to as "reserved." Note that the random number for determining the type of variation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (Random 3) may be extracted when the special pattern begins to vary, rather than being extracted at the time of the start winning and stored in advance in the reserved memory buffer.

Figure 8-7 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process executed as part of S101. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first start port switch 22A is on (S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 22A is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the first pending memory count has reached its upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the first pending memory count counter for counting the first pending memory count is 4) (S1212). If the first pending memory count has reached its upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning effect process that determines in advance at the time of the initial winning the result of the change display and the type of change pattern that will occur when a change based on the initial winning of the detected first special symbol is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, when a start win occurs at the first start win slot or the second start win slot, and the various data obtained at the time of the start win is stored as reserved memory information, and then the conditions for starting the variable display are met, the special pattern normal processing (S110) determines, based on the reserved memory information, whether the variable display result for the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that starts the variable display is a jackpot display result, and determines the jackpot type, based on the jackpot determination value and jackpot type determination value set in correspondence with the various random number values described above. Then, in the variable pattern setting processing (S111), the variable pattern (including the determination of the variable pattern type) is determined based on the variable pattern type determination value and variable pattern determination value set in correspondence with the various random number values described above.

Meanwhile, separate from such determinations, before the variable display based on a start entry into the first or second start entry port begins, specifically, when the game ball starts entering the first or second start entry port (when the hold memory information is stored), the hold memory information that stores the various data obtained at the time of the start entry is read in advance, and based on the read-ahead hold memory information, a win-time presentation process is executed that makes a pre-reading judgment based on the jackpot determination value, jackpot type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value set in correspondence with the various random number values described above, to determine whether or not a jackpot will occur, whether or not a minor jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot, and the variation pattern type. By doing so, the presentation control CPU 120 can predict the result of the variable display before the display of the presentation pattern is actually executed, and can execute pre-reading presentations such as pre-reading announcements that warn of a jackpot (possibility of a jackpot) during the display of the presentation pattern based on the various judgment results at the time of the start entry.

Then, based on the determination result of the winning presentation processing, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a symbol designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (S1216), and also controls the transmission of a variable type command to the presentation control CPU 120 (S1217). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a first start winning designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (S1218), and also controls the transmission of a first pending memory count designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 by setting the value of the first pending memory count counter to EXT data (S1219).

By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the presentation control CPU 120 each time a start win is made in the first start win slot.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning slot, a set of four commands - a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a first start winning designation command, and a first pending memory count designation command - are sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second start port switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not on, the process ends. If the second start port switch 22B is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter for counting the second reserved memory count is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process ends.

If the second reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining the jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, CPU 103 executes a winning effect process similar to the winning effect process described in S1215 for the detected start winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Based on the results of the winning effect process, CPU 103 then controls the transmission of a symbol designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1226) and the transmission of a variable type command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1227). Furthermore, CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second starting winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1228), and also controls the transmission of a second reserved memory count designation command to the effect control CPU 120 by setting the value of the second reserved memory count counter to EXT data (S1229).

By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the presentation control CPU 120 each time a start winning occurs in the second start winning slot.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning occurs in the second start winning slot, a set of four commands - a symbol designation command, a variable type command, a second start winning designation command, and a second reserved memory count designation command - are sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Figure 8-8 is a flowchart showing the normal special symbol processing (S110) in the special symbol process. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (S51). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, the process ends.

If there is no reserved data in the reserved memory buffer in S51, processing is performed to send a customer waiting demo designation command (S80), and then processing is terminated. On the other hand, if there is reserved data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved data in the second reserved memory buffer (S52). If there is reserved data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is set to data indicating "2" (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "1" (S53).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, a common processing routine is used to display the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

Under the control of S52 to S54, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special pattern display device 4B based on the data in that second reserved memory will be executed in priority over the variable display of the first special pattern display device 4A based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores them in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer of RAM 102. Furthermore, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1, and stores them in the random number buffer of RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Furthermore, if the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and erases the contents of the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2," the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted will always match the order of the first pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. Furthermore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted will always match the order of the second pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special pattern pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (S59). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first," the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second," the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the normal special symbol processing, first, data indicating "first" indicating that processing will be performed on the first starting winning slot, i.e., data indicating "first" indicating that processing will be performed on the first special symbol, or data indicating "second" indicating that processing will be performed on the second starting winning slot, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that processing will be performed on the second special symbol, is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing is performed according to the data set in the special symbol pointer. Therefore, commonality can be achieved between cases where the first special symbol is the target and cases where the second special symbol is the target.

Next, the CPU 103 reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passing process or S1224 of the start port switch passing process and stored in the reserved memory buffer or random number buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes the process of comparing the random number for determining a jackpot with predetermined jackpot determination values or small jackpot determination values, and determining that a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining a jackpot or small jackpot.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches one of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 8-4 (A), or if the second special symbol matches one of the jackpot determination values shown in Figure 8-4 (B), it is determined that the special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot gaming state, but also determining whether or not to treat the stopped symbol on the special symbol display as a jackpot symbol.

If it is determined in S61 that a jackpot has occurred (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1" (S72). If the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer is not pointing to "1" (if it is pointing to "2"), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (D) is selected (S74), and the process proceeds to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the random number (Random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

Furthermore, if the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values in S61 (N in S61), the process checks whether the data set in the special symbol pointer indicates "second," thereby checking whether the jackpot determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (the variable display of the second special symbol), the process uses the second special symbol hit determination table in Figure 8-4 (B) to determine whether the value of the random number (Random R) for determining a jackpot matches any of the small hit determination values, thereby performing the small hit determination process (S77). In other words, if the value of the random number (Random R) used to determine a big win matches one of the small win determination values shown in Figure 8-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is determined that a small win has occurred for the second special symbol. If a small win has been determined (Y in S77), a small win flag indicating a small win is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, the small hit via jackpot type determination table in Figure 8-4 (E) is selected (S79), and the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (Random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined to be the type of jackpot via small hit (S80). Then, proceed to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the random number (Random R) for small hit determination does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), proceed to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, if the jackpot type is a "15R time-saving jackpot with symbol," "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is a "4R time-saving jackpot with symbol," "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a "16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot," "03" is set in a provisional jackpot type buffer separate from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, "04" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, "05" is set in the provisional jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, data indicating a 16 (15) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, a 9 (8) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, and a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot are provisionally set as they will not result in a jackpot unless a V win occurs during small jackpot play.

In S82, the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, if neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol for the special symbol is set to "-", which indicates a loss. If the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol for the special symbol is determined to be one of "1", "5", or "9", which corresponds to the small win type selected and determined in S80. If the big win flag is set, the stopping symbol for the special symbol is determined to be one of "3" or "7", which corresponds to the big win type selected and determined in S75. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

Figure 8-9 is a flowchart showing the small win release pre-processing (S118). In the small win release pre-processing, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to open the movable part 872 based on the small win release mode, thereby starting the opening operation of the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 (S411). Next, the CPU 103 sends a small win start command to the presentation control CPU 120, indicating that the small win game state is about to begin (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets the V-determination winning number counter as a counting means to use the number of winnings in the V-winning area 870 during the small win release state as the end condition for that release state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-determination winning number counter is set to "10," setting it to count down the number of V-winnings. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release processing (S119) (S414).

Figure 8-10 is a flowchart showing the small win release process (S119) in the special symbol process. During the small win release process, the CPU 103 updates the small win release control timer by subtracting 1 (S430). Next, in S435 (described later), it checks whether the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter, which counts the number of V-winning balls, is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" in S413 of Figure 8-9, and when 10 V-winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0." If the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it checks whether the small win release control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

If the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the small win opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled in accordance with the count value of the small win opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small win, causing the movable part 872 to operate in the open state, and processing is performed to open and close the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 (S433).

Next, to determine whether a V entry has been detected, which occurs when a game ball enters the V entry area 870, which is open inside the V determination entry device 87, through the V entry opening, the V entry switch 87a is determined to be in the ON state (S434). If the V entry switch 87a is in the ON state in S434, a V entry has been detected, and the V entry flag, which is set when a V entry is detected, is set (S435). Then, processing is performed to send a V entry ball detection command (S436). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that a V entry ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of V entries. Next, the solenoid is driven to operate the opening/closing member, changing the V entry opening of the V entry area 870 from an open state to a closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 enters the V-winning hole, the V-winning opening of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and all game balls that subsequently enter the V-determination winning device 87 are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V-determination winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, if the switch is not on in S434, it means that a V win has not been detected, and it is determined whether the V-determining win switch 15a is on (S438). If the switch is on in S438, proceed to S439; if the switch is not on in S438, processing ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball number counter, which was set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 8-9, is counted down by "-1" (S439), and processing is performed to send a V-judgment winning ball detection command (S440). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V-judgment winning ball has been detected after a V-judgment winning ball has been detected, and to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the judgment winning device 87.

When the count value of the V-determination winning number counter is "0" in S431, this means that the number of V-determination winnings for small wins has reached the upper limit, thereby satisfying the small win release termination condition. When the small win release control timer times out in S432, this means that the small win release termination condition has been satisfied due to the end of the small win release control. In these cases, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable part 872 to a closed state, thereby closing the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-determination winning number counter is "0," the V-determination winning device 87 is forcibly closed in accordance with the count value of the V-determination winning number counter, even if it is in the middle of opening in accordance with the small win release mode. When the small win release control timer times out, the V-determination winning device 87 is closed in accordance with the end of the small win release control for the small win release mode.

Next, data corresponding to the specific period that is the valid period for a V prize after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V prize valid period timer (S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win end processing (S120) (S443), and processing ends. This starts timing the specific period that is the valid period for a V prize after the V determination winning device 87 is closed. Note that by setting the specific period that is the valid period for a V prize in this way, the game ball can be detected even if it happens to pass through the V prize area later than the normal time. Furthermore, because the specific period has been set, even if someone tries to fraudulently enter the V prize area, only that period will be detected, which can also prevent fraud.

Figure 8-11 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special symbol process. During the small win end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V prize validity period timer by subtracting 1 (S441) and checks whether the V prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

If the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when a V winning is detected, has been set (S443). If the V winning flag has been set, processing ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag has not been set, it is determined whether the V winning switch 87a is in the on state (S444) to determine whether a V winning, which occurs when a gaming ball enters the V winning area 870 during the V winning validity period, has been detected. If the V winning switch 87a is not in the on state in S444, processing ends. On the other hand, if the V winning switch 87a is in the on state in S444, it means that a V winning has been detected during the V winning validity period, and the V winning flag is set to indicate that a V winning has been detected (S445). Then, processing is performed to send a V winning designation command (S446), and processing ends. This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

If the V prize validity period timer has timed out in S442, processing is performed to send a small prize end command (S447). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that the small prize has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V prize area 870 (V prize opening) to an open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (S448). If the V prize flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big prize, and the big prize flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small win gaming state, if you hit the ball to the right in accordance with the right hit promotion notification described below, there is an approximately 100% probability that the gaming ball will enter the V-determination winning device 87. Any gaming ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 will always enter the V-winning area 870, resulting in the V-winning flag being set with an approximately 100% probability (S435 in Figures 8-10). Based on this, the big win flag is set in S449, and the gaming state is controlled to a big win state.

Next, the CPU 103 officially stores the data indicating the jackpot type via a small jackpot stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the determination that a V win has resulted in a proper jackpot (S450). The time-saving flag that was set at that time is then temporarily reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start 3 command, a jackpot start 4 command, or a jackpot start 5 command depending on the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that a jackpot game state has begun. Next, the jackpot entry port control timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (S453).

Furthermore, the jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 is referenced, and opening pattern data indicating the opening mode, such as the number of openings (e.g., 15, 8, or 4), opening time (e.g., 29 seconds), and interval time (time the large prize opening is closed between rounds), depending on the type of jackpot, is set in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 (S454). Of this data, the number of openings data is set in an opening count counter that counts the number of openings. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and processing ends. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot gaming state, the game transitions to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, a jackpot gaming state will not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via a small win stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (S457), and processing ends. As a result, if a V winning does not occur in a small win gaming state, the game will not transition to a jackpot gaming state.

[Explanation of Feature 02TM]
Next, the characteristic part 02TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-66.
In this embodiment, the count value (jackpot occurrence count value) can be updated in response to being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.
Furthermore, when this count value exceeds a predetermined value (mode switching determination value (in this example, "3") or more), the variable display period can be made shorter than the variable display period when this count value does not exceed the predetermined value (mode switching determination value (in this example, less than "3")).
In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can display a specific display (jackpot count display) on the image display device 5 regarding the relationship between this count value and a predetermined value.

[Decorative designs, small designs]
Each performance symbol (decorative symbol, small symbol) in this embodiment will be described in detail.

<Decorative design>
In this embodiment, decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The decorative symbols in this embodiment are composed of number symbols indicating numbers, etc.

In this embodiment, decorative designs including number designs are decorative designs corresponding to the numbers "1" through "7," such as decorative designs including the numbers "1" through "7."

In addition, in this embodiment, the even-numbered decorative patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "2," "4," and "6") are blue (in this example, decorative patterns shown with blue numbers), the odd-numbered decorative patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "1," "3," and "5") excluding the number "7" are red (in this example, decorative patterns shown with red numbers), and the odd-numbered decorative pattern for the number "7" (numbered pattern corresponding to the number "7") is gold (in this example, decorative patterns shown with gold numbers).

(Defined decorative design)
In this embodiment, as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, a variable display of decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special symbol) in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is stopped/determined in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a symbol matching effect is executed, and a determined decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols is also stopped (derived).

In this embodiment, the type of determined decorative symbol varies depending on the display result and the type of jackpot (see Figures 9-3 and 9-4). In this embodiment, the determined decorative symbols are set to include loss symbols, even symbols, and odd symbols.

<Small design>
In this embodiment, the small symbols are symbols that are smaller than the decorative symbols and are displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, and indicate whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special symbol. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stationary display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stationary display of the special symbol. The areas in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed in a variable manner and stationary manner are designated, from the left, as the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area 5r, and the areas in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small symbols corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner and stationary manner are also common to the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

The small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbols is lower than that of the decorative symbols.

[Active display, Hold display, Hold memory count]
In this embodiment, a first hold display area 02TM01E that displays the first hold memory number (0 to 4 first hold displays 02TM01) is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and a second hold display area 02TM02E that displays the second hold memory number (0 to 4 second hold displays 02TM02) is provided at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, an active display area 02TM03E that displays an active display 02TM03, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed, is provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, a first pending memory count display area that displays the first pending memory count may be provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending memory count display area 02TM01E), and a second pending memory count display area 02TM06E that displays the second pending memory count may be provided on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the second pending memory count display area 02TM02E).

Here, the first hold display area 02TM01E displays a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first hold memory number, and the second hold display area 02TM02E displays a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the second hold memory number.

[Time-saving mode]
In this embodiment, the time-saving state is a state in which control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average normal symbol fluctuation time (the period during which the normal symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state and improving the probability of a "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state continues until one of the following conditions is met first: (A) a predetermined number of special games have been played, (B) the game is controlled to a big win game state, or (C) the game is controlled to a specific type of small win game state. A state in which the condition for the game to end is that a predetermined number of special games have been played is also called a "time-saving state with a time limit cut off" (time-saving state with a time limit cut off).

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving states are provided: time-saving state A and time-saving state B. Time-saving state A ends when one of the following conditions is met: (A) 10,000 special games with the second special symbol have been played, (B) control has been placed into a big win gaming state, or (C) control has been placed into a small win gaming state corresponding to a normal small win, as described below.

In addition, the b time-saving state ends when one of the following conditions is met: (A) 10,000 special games with the second special symbol have been played, or (B) control has been made to a jackpot gaming state. Unlike the a time-saving state, the b time-saving state does not end when (C) control has been made to a small jackpot gaming state corresponding to a normal small jackpot (see Figure 9-21 (3) No. 3-1).

[Winning type table]
Figure 9-1 is a diagram showing a hit type table. Of the hit type tables, Figure 9-1 (1) is a diagram showing a jackpot type table, and Figure 9-1 (2) is a diagram showing a jackpot via small hit type table. The hit type table shows, for each type of jackpot, the conditions for jackpot occurrence, the control state (game state) after the jackpot, the number of times the jackpot is opened (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the jackpot.

In this embodiment, the following jackpot types are available: "3R symbol normal jackpot," "10Ra time-saving jackpot," "10Rb time-saving jackpot," "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot," and "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot."

A small win occurs when the display result of the first special symbol or second special symbol becomes a small win symbol. Whether the display result of the special symbol will be a small win symbol is determined in advance by random number lottery (special symbol small win determination). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 opens in either an opening pattern with one opening and an opening time of 0.04 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "first opening pattern"), or an opening pattern with ten openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "second opening pattern") (hereinafter referred to as the "second opening pattern").

In the case of a small win, prize balls are paid out for game balls that enter the V winning area 870 in the V-determining winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small win game state, it is set that approximately 10 winning balls may occur, and prize balls may be paid out according to the winning balls.

If a game ball enters the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 while the operating port is open and the game ball enters the V-entry area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V entry), a jackpot will occur. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a small win via jackpot. Small win via jackpots include a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small win" and a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small win," which have different opening patterns for the V-determination winning device 87.

In this embodiment, a small hit corresponding to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small hit" has the first opening pattern of the V-determined winning device 87, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the V-determined winning device 87, and it is not expected to result in a jackpot. Furthermore, if a small hit occurs when controlled to the a-time saving state and a V-winning is not possible, after the end of the small hit, the system will not be controlled to the a-time saving state but will be controlled to the normal state (see Figure 9-24). Therefore, a small hit corresponding to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small hit" is essentially a small hit that is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state. Below, this small hit will be referred to as a "normal small hit," a "falling small hit," or a "first small hit" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" has the second opening pattern of the V-determined winning device 87, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V-determined winning device 87, and it is expected to result in a jackpot. Furthermore, if a V-winning is achieved with this small hit that occurs while controlled in the a-time saving state, the system will be controlled to the a-time saving state after the end of the jackpot corresponding to that small hit. Therefore, this small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" will essentially be a small hit that will also be controlled to the time-saving state next time. Below, this small hit will be referred to as a "time-saving small hit," "continuous small hit," or "second small hit" as appropriate.

On the other hand, jackpots that occur directly due to the variable display of special symbols, without going through a minor jackpot, are called pattern jackpots. Pattern jackpots include "pattern 3R normal jackpots," "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpots," and "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpots," which occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol.

As such, jackpots include symbol jackpots that occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and small jackpots that occur by winning a V via a small jackpot based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 9-1 (1), a "3R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens three times (3R). The game state controlled after a "3R time-limited jackpot" is the normal state.

In addition, a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the a time-saving state.

The time-saving state "a" has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, and another in which the total number of times the first and second special symbols are displayed 10,004 times (not shown). The number of times required for the time-saving state "a" to be displayed 10,000 times is determined by taking into account that when a "time-saving small win" occurs, a game ball that enters the V-judging winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 with a probability of approximately 100%. When the second special symbol is displayed with a variable display, a small win occurs with a probability of approximately 1 in 41.1. Therefore, the end condition for the time-saving state "a" to be displayed 10,000 times is set to the number of times that a small win is likely to occur with a probability of approximately 100% when the second special symbol is displayed with a variable display, and the next small win is essentially confirmed. However, in this embodiment, where there are two types of small wins that can occur in the time-saving mode: a "normal small win" and a "time-saving small win," if a "normal small win" occurs, no big win will occur and the game will be controlled to the normal mode.

In addition, a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the b time-saving state.

The b time-saving state after a "10Rb time-saving big win" has two end conditions, one of which is that the second special symbol changes 10,000 times, and the other is that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 10,004 (not shown). The number of times required for the b time-saving state to change 10,000 times is set based on the fact that when a "small time-saving small win" occurs, a gaming ball that enters the V-determining winning device 87 will enter the V-winning area 870 at a rate of approximately 100%. When the second special symbol changes, a small win occurs at a rate of approximately 1 in 41.1. Therefore, the condition for ending the time-saving b state, in which the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, is set to the number of times that there is an approximately 100% chance of a small win occurring when the second special symbol is displayed, and the next small win is essentially guaranteed. However, in this embodiment, where the small wins that occur in the time-saving b state include "normal small wins" and "time-saving small wins," even if a "normal small win" occurs, no big win will occur and the game will continue to be controlled to the time-saving b state. Therefore, the time-saving b state is essentially a game state in which the second special symbol is displayed variably until a "time-saving small win" is won, and there is an approximately 100% chance of a big win via a small win, and the next big win is essentially guaranteed.

As shown in Figure 9-1 (2), a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.04 seconds x 1 time), and then the large winning slot opens 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. Also, a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win" is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large winning slot opens 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. In these time-saving jackpots via small wins, the winning device opens for one round, but the large winning slot actually opens 10 times, and players perceive the opening of the large winning slot as being the same or similar type of jackpot as a 10R time-saving jackpot with a pattern.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is configured to allow entry from the first path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the first path in terms of starting the winning than if the game ball flowed down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens is configured to allow entry from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path in terms of winning in the event of a jackpot than if the game ball flowed down the first path. Also, in a special state such as a small jackpot game state, the V-determining winning device 87 that opens is configured to allow entry from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path in terms of winning a jackpot than if the game ball flowed down the first path.

In addition to this comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning)) are provided on the first and second paths, and in the normal low base state, it is easier to win at that variable winning port via the first path than via the second path, and in other states such as the high base state, jackpot game state, and small jackpot game state, it is easier to win at that variable winning port via the second path than via the first path, such that in the normal state it is more advantageous for the player for the gaming medium to flow down the first path, and in other game states it is more advantageous for the player for the gaming medium to flow down the second path.

[Random value]
9-2(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-2(A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are countable.

Note that random number values other than these may also be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters and updated by software, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random number values MR1 to MR5 are set within the ranges shown in Figure 9-2 (A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of these random number values MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, enabling it to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern table that stores multiple types of variable patterns that result in the variable display mode of each symbol, such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol.

[Display result determination table]
9-2(B) ((B1) and (B2)) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 9-2 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table [for the first special symbol]. The display result determination table [for the first special symbol] is a data table for determining whether a first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 9-2 (B1), the top row is the big hit determination table section, and the bottom row is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the top row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win for the first special symbol is 1/319.7. The probability of a small win for the first special symbol is set at 1/200.

Figure 9-2 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table [for the second special symbol]. The display result determination table [for the second special symbol] is a data table for determining whether a second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 9-2 (B2), the top row is the big hit determination table section, and the bottom row is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the top row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win for the second special symbol is 1/319.7. The probability of a small win for the second special symbol is set at 1/41.1.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a small win is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this configuration. A configuration in which a small win is provided for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol may also be adopted. For example, a small win may be provided for the second special symbol, while a small win may not be provided for the first special symbol.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry slot (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry slot (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random number value MR1) of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing.

For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table [for first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is determined for the first special symbol. If the extracted value does not match one of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table [for first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the small jackpot determination values, a small jackpot is determined for the first special symbol.

For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table [for second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the jackpot determination values, a jackpot is determined for the second special symbol. If the extracted value does not match one of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination values set in the display result determination table [for second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the small jackpot determination values, a small jackpot is determined for the second special symbol. Deciding on a small jackpot also means provisionally deciding on a jackpot via a small jackpot (it is written as provisionally decided because if a V win does not occur during a small jackpot, it will not be controlled as a jackpot).

Determining whether to have a big win or not means determining whether to transition to a big win gaming state, but also determining whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Determining whether to have a small win or not means determining whether to transition to a small win gaming state, but also determining whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the small win pattern.

[Jackpot type determination table]
Figures 9-3 and 9-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table and the jackpot type determination table via small jackpot stored in ROM 101.

Figure 9-3 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot for a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state, and a jackpot type determination table via a small jackpot used to determine the type of jackpot for a jackpot via a small jackpot when a small jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the normal game state.

Figure 9-4 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot for a symbol jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in time-saving state a or time-saving state b, and a jackpot type determination table via small jackpot used to determine the type of jackpot for a jackpot via small jackpot when a small jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in time-saving state a or time-saving state b.

These jackpot type determination tables and jackpot via small jackpot type determination tables contain the number of time-saving controls executed after each jackpot, the type of determined decorative pattern, and a jackpot determination value, which is a number compared with the random number value MR2 used to determine the jackpot type, for each jackpot type (jackpot via small jackpot type).

<Normal state jackpot type determination table>
Figure 9-3 (A1) is a jackpot type determination table [for first special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state. Figure 9-3 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol when the game state is in the normal state.

([First special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] in Figure 9-3 (A1) contains values to be compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to each of "pattern 3R normal jackpot,""pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," and "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot."

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 119 (40%) is assigned to a "3R symbol normal jackpot," 120 to 239 (40%) is assigned to a "10Ra symbol time-saving jackpot," and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to a "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot."

Figure 9-3 (A1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 0 for a "3R normal jackpot," 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot," and 10,000 for a "10Rb time-saving jackpot."

Figure 9-3 (A1) also shows the type of fixed decorative symbol corresponding to each type of jackpot. In this example, the types of fixed decorative symbols are even symbols for a "3R normal jackpot," odd symbols excluding the number symbol "7" for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot," and odd symbols including the number symbol "7" for a "10Rb time-saving jackpot."

([Second special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] in Figure 9-3 (A2) contains a jackpot determination value that corresponds to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" and is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 9-3 (A2) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 9-3 (A2) also shows the type of fixed decorative symbol corresponding to each type of jackpot. In this example, the "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortened Jackpot" is an odd-numbered symbol with the fixed decorative symbol type being the number symbol "7."

<Normal state small hit via big hit type determination table>
Figure 9-3 (B1) is a small win via jackpot type determination table [for first special symbol] used to determine the small win via jackpot type of a small win via jackpot when a small win is determined to be a small win by the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state. Figure 9-3 (B2) is a small win via jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol] used to determine the small win via jackpot type of a small win via jackpot when a small win is determined to be a small win by the second special symbol when the game state is in the normal state.

([For the first special symbol] Small hit via big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for first special pattern] in Figure 9-3 (B1) contains a jackpot determination value that corresponds to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" and is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the [First Special Symbol] Small Win via Big Win Type Determination Table, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "Normal Small Win via 10Ra Time-Shortened Big Win."

Figure 9-3 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 9-3 (B1) also shows the type of fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of fixed decorative symbol for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" is a miss symbol. In this embodiment, if a V win occurs when a "normal small win" occurs, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state and then to a normal state (see Figure 9-19).

([For the second special symbol] Small hit via big hit type determination table)
The small jackpot type determination table [for the second special pattern] in Figure 9-3 (B2) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and is set with a jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via normal small jackpot" and "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via time-shortened small jackpot."

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table for small wins, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 74 (25%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win," and 75 to 299 (75%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win."

Figure 9-3 (B2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot."

Figure 9-3 (B2) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" is a missing pattern or a special pattern (described later), while for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win" it is an odd number pattern, the number "7."

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs under normal conditions is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as fanfare effects.

In addition, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs under normal conditions is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this small win fanfare period are referred to as small win fanfare effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds for all variable display patterns executed in normal mode (not shown).

<A time-saving state, B time-saving state jackpot type determination table>
Figure 9-4 (A1) is a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b). Figure 9-4 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state.

([First special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] in Figure 9-4 (A1) contains jackpot determination values that are compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to each of the "pattern 3Rb time-shortened jackpot" and "pattern 10Ra time-shortened jackpot."

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 239 (80%) is assigned to a "3Rb time-saving jackpot," and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 9-4 (A1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "3Rb time-saving jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 9-4 (A1) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern corresponding to each type of jackpot. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern is the odd number pattern "3" for the "Pattern 3Rb Time-saving Jackpot," and the odd number pattern "7" for the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving Jackpot."

As shown in Figure 9-4 (A1), when a jackpot is determined to have occurred based on the first special symbol while the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b), the jackpot type is determined to be either a "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" or a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," allowing appropriate presentation control to be performed when a jackpot is determined to have occurred based on the first special symbol while the game state is in the time-saving state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is won on the first hit, the game is controlled to the b time-saving state, which essentially guarantees the next jackpot. A notification (the 3000 notification notification described below) is executed on the first hit to notify the player that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of the 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the first hit and the 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the essentially guaranteed next jackpot, and the player is aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded (see Figure 9-54).

In addition, even if the game is controlled to the b time-saving state, if for some reason the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the variable display of the reserved memory of the first special symbol (variable display whose execution is pending (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the starting winning that occurred during the period until the variable display that won the initial win ends may be executed. If the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed at this time is determined to be a "jackpot," the number of prize balls that has/will be awarded will differ depending on the type of jackpot that occurs (hereinafter referred to as an "irregular special 1 jackpot")

(A) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is "Pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot",
(A1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
(A2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 3 rounds of prize balls (450 balls)
(A3) Irregular special 1. In the b time-saving state controlled after the jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed. 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
This effectively guarantees that a total of 3,450 prize balls will be awarded.

(B) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot",
(B1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
(B2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
This effectively guarantees that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded.

In addition, in the time-saving mode A, which is controlled after an irregular special jackpot, the next jackpot is not essentially guaranteed, so here (B3) it is not considered to be essentially guaranteed that 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls) will be awarded.

In this embodiment, the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first win makes the player aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded. Even if an irregular special 1 jackpot occurs, if a jackpot is determined to be a "Pattern 3Rb time-limited jackpot" or a "Pattern 10Ra time-limited jackpot" when the game state is in the time-limited state, by adopting a configuration in which the jackpot type is determined to be either a "Pattern 3Rb time-limited jackpot" or a "Pattern 10Ra time-limited jackpot," it becomes possible to award more than 3000 prize balls, preventing inconsistencies in the content of the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first win and preventing the player from being at an excessive disadvantage in terms of the number of prize balls awarded.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is determined to be a result of the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b), the jackpot type will not be determined to be a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot."

(C) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot",
(C1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
(C2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
(A3) Irregular special 1. In the b time-saving state controlled after the jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed. 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
This would essentially guarantee that a total of 4,500 prize balls would be awarded, which would create a contradiction with the content of the 3,000 notification effect at the time of the first win, and would also give the player an excessive advantage in terms of the number of prize balls awarded, so a "Pattern 10Rb Time-Shortened Jackpot" is not provided as a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern when the game state is in the time-shortened state.

([Second special symbol] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] in Figure 9-4 (A2) contains a jackpot determination value that corresponds to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" and is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 9-4 (A2) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 9-4 (A2) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this example, the "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortened Jackpot" is an odd-numbered fixed decorative pattern with the numeric pattern "7."

<A time-saving state, B time-saving state small hit via big hit type determination table>
Figure 9-4 (B1) is a jackpot type determination table via small win [for the first special symbol] when a small win is determined by the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b). Figure 9-4 (B2) is a jackpot type determination table via small win [for the second special symbol] when a small win is determined by the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state.

([For the first special symbol] Small hit via big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for first special pattern] in Figure 9-4 (B1) contains a jackpot determination value that corresponds to a "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via normal small win" and is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the [First Special Symbol] Small Win via Big Win Type Determination Table, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "Normal Small Win via 10Ra Time-Shortened Big Win."

Figure 9-4 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 9-4 (B1) also shows the type of fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of fixed decorative symbol for a "normal small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot" is a miss symbol.

([For the second special symbol] Small hit via big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for the second special pattern] in Figure 9-4 (B2) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via normal small win" and "10Ra time-shortened jackpot via time-shortened small win" are set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table for small wins, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 74 (25%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win," and 75 to 299 (75%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win."

Figure 9-4 (B2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot."

Figure 9-4 (B2) also shows the type of confirmed decorative pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of confirmed decorative pattern is a missing pattern in the a time-saving state of a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win," a special pattern in the b time-saving state (in this example, a special pattern with the word "END" displayed), and an odd number pattern of the number "7" for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win."

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period is set to 0.1 seconds when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs in time-saving mode A or time-saving mode B. The various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as jackpot fanfare effects.

In addition, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs in the A time-saving mode or the B time-saving normal mode is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this small win fanfare period are referred to as small win fanfare effects.

In addition, in both the a time-saving state and the b time-saving state, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds (see Figures 9-15 to 9-20).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns mentioned above depending on the pre-determination result.

<Fluctuation pattern without reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a reach (such as "long fluctuation miss,""high-speedmiss,""ultra-high-speedmiss,""high-speed time-saving small hit,""ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit,""entering fluctuation miss,""entering fluctuation big hit,""entering fluctuation time-saving small hit,""pseudo fluctuation miss,""direct big hit,"("high-speed normal small hit" = "high-speed miss")") is a fluctuation pattern in which a reach is not established after the fluctuation display has started, and a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the fluctuation display result will be either a "miss,""bighit,""time-saving small hit," or "normal small hit" is displayed in a stopped state.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "miss," the fluctuation display period when determined to be a "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern is 1000 ms, when determined to be a "super-high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 200 ms, when determined to be a "long fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 10,000 ms, when determined to be a "thrust fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 30,200 ms, and when determined to be a "pseudo fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 2,800 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "jackpot," the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern is 10,000 ms, and when it is determined to be a "break-in fluctuation jackpot" fluctuation pattern is 40,000 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "time-saving small win," the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern is 5,000 ms, when it is determined to be a "ultra-high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 500 ms, and when it is determined to be a "push-in fluctuation time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display period is 30,500 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "normal small win," the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "high-speed normal small win" fluctuation pattern is 1000 ms.

Regarding the fluctuation pattern of a normal small win during b time reduction: In this embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a "normal small win" in the b time reduction state, it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of a "high-speed normal small win." This "high-speed normal small win" fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern with the same presentation as the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, and after the fluctuation display starts, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the fact that a reach is not established and the fluctuation display result is a "miss" (for example, "245") is displayed stationary. When a "normal small win" occurs in the b time reduction state, even if a V win does not occur, the system continues to be controlled to the b time reduction state (i.e., it is not controlled to the normal state (does not fall)) (see Figure 9-24). Since there is no need to notify that the fluctuation display result has become a "normal small win" in the b time reduction state, the same fluctuation pattern as when the fluctuation display result is a "miss" is used.

<Example of "Super High Speed Time Shortening Small Win">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is "ultra-fast time-saving small hit" will be explained using Figure 9-5.

Figure 9-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images for each effect associated with the "ultra-high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

Figures 9-5 (1) and (2) show the various effect images and third decorative symbols corresponding to the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] effect mode, and as they are the same as those in Figures 9-28 (1) and (2) described below, their explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-5 (3), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a reduced size, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in a reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display being a "time-saving small win."

Next, as shown in Figure 9-5 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the effect control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") that results in a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (i.e., a symbol matching effect is being executed for the third decorative symbols). At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displaying variable small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-5 (5), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, fixes and stops the fixed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (i.e., executing a symbol matching effect for the third decorative symbol). At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is fixed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-5 (6), when the CPU 103 starts a small win game in the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a small win game start image on the image display device 5. This small win game start image is an image that includes a small win right hit promotion image containing the words "Aim for V!!" to win a V and an arrow image indicating a right hit, as well as an ally character.

[Inrush fluctuation]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern executed in the first fluctuation of the time-saving state a when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (i.e., the first fluctuation of the first controlled "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") is composed of a fluctuation pattern (first half) and a fluctuation pattern (second half). In the fluctuation pattern (first half), for example, a "push-in fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is executed. In this embodiment, after the "push-in fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is executed in the fluctuation pattern (first half), a fluctuation pattern (second half) according to each fluctuation display result is executed.

In the variation pattern (second half), a decorative pattern variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display. This effect is called the "display result notification variation effect." In the display result notification variation effect of the variation pattern (second half), for example, if the variation display result is a "miss," a variation display of the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern (200 ms) is executed, and if the variation display result is a "time-saving small win," a variation display of the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" variation pattern (500 ms) is executed.

The "entry fluctuation" of the fluctuation pattern (first half) is a fluctuation pattern in which, after information suggesting the currently controlled presentation mode is displayed, a pseudo-fluctuation presentation of decorative symbols (the display of decorative symbols begins to fluctuate, a combination of decorative symbols that results in a "miss" when a reach is not achieved is temporarily stopped, and then the display of decorative symbols begins to fluctuate, a combination of decorative symbols that results in a "miss" when a reach is not achieved is temporarily stopped, repeating this pseudo-fluctuation), and at a predetermined timing, information suggesting the currently controlled presentation mode is displayed again, along with information suggesting that the currently controlled presentation mode will be started (see Figures 9-7 to 9-9). Hereinafter, the series of pseudo-fluctuations from the display of decorative symbols beginning to the temporary stopping of a combination of decorative symbols that results in a "miss" when a reach is not achieved is referred to as a "unit pseudo-fluctuation." Therefore, a pseudo-fluctuation presentation is a presentation in which multiple unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed.

In the "entry fluctuation" of this embodiment, the information suggesting the currently controlled presentation mode is the words "ultra-high speed" or "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start suggestion presentation"), and the information suggesting that the currently controlled presentation mode will begin is the words "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" or "entering ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start notification presentation").

In addition, the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols in a "thrust fluctuation" is such that the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period is shorter than the period from when the first decorative symbol fluctuation display begins until the decorative symbol combination that results in a "miss" without a reach being achieved (hereinafter referred to as the "unit pseudo-fluctuation period" as appropriate), and the third unit pseudo-fluctuation period is shorter than the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period. Similarly, the unit pseudo-fluctuation period becomes shorter each time a pseudo-fluctuation is executed thereafter, i.e., the speed of the pseudo-fluctuation becomes faster at an accelerated rate. Below, this type of pseudo-fluctuation effect is referred to as an "accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect" as appropriate. In this example, a total of seven unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed in the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect.

In this way, by executing an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect in the fluctuation pattern of the first "entry fluctuation" of the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" that is controlled for the first time, it is possible to impress upon the player that the speed at which the fluctuation display of the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" is consumed is faster than the speed at which the fluctuation display of other presentation modes is consumed.

In this embodiment, when a pseudo-change of a decorative symbol (the "third decorative symbol" described below) during an acceleration pseudo-change performance is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, if the third decorative symbol temporarily stops, the display includes the base symbol and the number symbol, but does not include a light effect display. At this time, the display color of the third decorative symbol is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and is displayed in a manner in which the display color inside the number symbol appears to shine (hereinafter referred to as a "special mode" as appropriate). In this way, when the third decorative symbol temporarily stops during an acceleration pseudo-change performance, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a manner that does not include a light effect display, but by being displayed in a special mode, the player is made aware that the currently executing change is a pseudo-change.

In addition, when the accelerated pseudo-variation effect ends and a variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display, the third decorative symbol is not displayed in a special manner, allowing the player to recognize that the currently executed variation is not a pseudo-variation, that is, that it is actually a variation display of a decorative symbol to notify the display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period of the jackpot game state when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the word "READY" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" will begin (the "entry fluctuation" will begin).

<Example of "Missing entry fluctuation">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is "entry fluctuation miss" will be explained using Figure 9-6 and Figures 9-7 to 9-10.

Figure 9-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the "enter-vary-miss" variation pattern, and Figures 9-7 to 9-10 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the effect images associated with the "enter-vary-miss" variation pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 9-7 (1), at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period in the jackpot game state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the word "READY" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-7 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-6), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication effect and displays the words "Super High Speed" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols begins in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figures 9-7 (3) to (7), during the period from 10 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the display of the second special symbol variation to 17.5 seconds (the period from T2 to T3 (7.5 seconds) shown in Figure 9-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation performance (first unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figures 9-7 (3), (6), and (7), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in Figure 9-7 (7), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication effect and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" are an image with a higher display priority than the third decorative symbol. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" and the third decorative symbol are displayed in that order.

The display of the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" text at this time is less visible than the display of the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" text displayed in the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect has ended. In this example, the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" text during the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect is displayed in light white text, while the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" text during the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect has ended is displayed in thick black text.

Next, as shown in Figures 9-7 (8) to 9-8 (11), during the period from 17.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the display of the second special symbol variation until 21 seconds have elapsed (the period from T3 to T4 (3.5 seconds) shown in Figure 9-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation performance (second unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figures 9-8 (10) and (11), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (11), the effect control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication effect and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-8 (12) and subsequent figures, after 21 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 began displaying the second special symbol (timing T4 shown in Figure 9-6), the effect control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation effect (third to eighth unit pseudo-variations), and executes pseudo-variations of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in Figures 9-9 (13) to (15), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation performance (seventh unit pseudo-variation) and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-9 (16), when 25.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 began displaying the second special symbol (timing T9 shown in Figure 9-6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the accelerated pseudo-variation effect, erases the third decorative symbol from the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes a mode start notification effect, and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" (in thick black letters) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-9 (17), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the mode start notification effect and displays the words "Entering Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH" (in thick black text) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figures 9-9 (18) to 9-10 (21), during the period from 30 seconds after CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbols to 30.2 seconds after (the period from T10 to T11 shown in Figure 9-6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the mode start notification effect, erases the words "Entering Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH" from the center of the screen of image display device 5, executes the variable display of the third decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of image display device 5, and stops (stops display, confirms stop) the confirmed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "145") that results in a "miss." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "145") is confirmed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the third decorative pattern is actually being displayed to notify the display result of the change display rather than a pseudo-change, displays the third decorative pattern in a manner that includes a light effect display rather than in a special manner when the third decorative pattern stops (stop display, confirmed stop). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays various performance images corresponding to the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] performance mode on the image display device 5 (see Figure 9-28 described below).

In this embodiment, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], if a "normal small win" occurs after a small number of variable display cycles, the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, which has a high probability of selecting a variable display pattern with an extremely short variable display period ("Super High Speed Miss" (0.2 seconds)) compared to other presentation modes. This means that there is a risk that the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], which can only be controlled after multiple jackpots have occurred, will end without sufficient play.

In consideration of the possibility of such a situation occurring, the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (30 seconds or more) is executed 100% of the time during the first fluctuation of the first controlled [Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH], ensuring a control period of at least 30 seconds for [Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH] even if you fall out of [Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage.

In addition, during the first fluctuation of the first controlled [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (accelerated pseudo fluctuation effect) is executed 100% of the time, so even if you fall out of [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage, pseudo fluctuations of the decorative symbols similar to the fluctuation display of the third decorative symbol in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] are executed multiple times, so although it is a pseudo fluctuation, you can still play the fluctuation display of the third decorative symbol in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] at least multiple times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the length of the jackpot ending period can be changed depending on the number of jackpots that occur. For example, the jackpot ending period for a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 (i.e., the jackpot immediately before the first "Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH" control) can be set to 30 seconds, and during this period, information suggesting that the first control will be set to "Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH" after the jackpot (such as the words "Ultra-High Speed," "Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH," or "Entering Ultra-High Speed HYPER RUSH") can be displayed.

However, pachinko gaming machines are prohibited from displaying decorative symbol variations or similar presentation modes during a jackpot game state (jackpot ending period). Therefore, while it is possible to display information suggesting that control will be switched to [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] for the first time during the jackpot ending period, it is not possible to execute an accelerated pseudo-variation presentation, and it is not possible to notify the player that the speed at which the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] variation display is consumed is faster than the speed at which the variation display is consumed in other presentation modes.

For this reason, in this embodiment, the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effects and the display of information suggesting that control will be switched to [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] for the first time are displayed during the first fluctuation controlled by [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], rather than during the jackpot ending period.

[Pseudo fluctuation deviation]
In this embodiment, the "pseudo fluctuation miss" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a unit pseudo fluctuation of a decorative pattern (the "third decorative pattern" described later) is executed three times in succession, and after the third unit pseudo fluctuation is completed, a variable display of the third decorative pattern is executed to notify that the display result is a "miss", and a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the display result is a "miss" is displayed in a stopped state (see Figures 9-12 and 9-13). In other words, this is a variation pattern in which three unit pseudo fluctuations and one variable display to notify the display result of the variable display are executed. The effect in which a variable display to notify the display result of the variable display is executed is called a "display result notification variable effect".

In this embodiment, the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols in the "pseudo-fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern is such that the first unit pseudo-fluctuation period, the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period, and the third unit pseudo-fluctuation period are all set to 700 ms, which is the period during which the decorative symbols undergo pseudo-fluctuation (200 ms) plus the period during which the decorative symbols temporarily stop (500 ms). In other words, a configuration is adopted in which all three unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed at the same speed (uniform speed). Hereinafter, this type of pseudo-fluctuation effect will be referred to as "uniform speed pseudo-fluctuation effect" as appropriate.

In this embodiment, when the pseudo-variation of the decorative symbols during the uniform speed pseudo-variation effect is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, if the third decorative symbol temporarily stops, the configuration includes a base symbol, a number symbol, and a light effect display. At this time, the display color of the third decorative symbol is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and the display color inside the number symbol is displayed in a manner that makes it appear to shine (hereinafter referred to as a "special manner" as appropriate). In this way, when the third decorative symbol temporarily stops during the uniform speed pseudo-variation effect, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner, allowing the player to recognize that the currently executing variation is a pseudo-variation.

In addition, when the uniform speed pseudo-variation effect ends and a variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display, the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, allowing the player to recognize that the variation currently being executed is not a pseudo-variation.

<Example of "pseudo fluctuation miss">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is a "pseudo fluctuation miss" will be explained using Figures 9-11 and 9-12 to 9-13.

Figure 9-11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with a "pseudo-fluctuating miss" fluctuation pattern, and Figures 9-12 to 9-13 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the effect images associated with a "pseudo-fluctuating miss" fluctuation pattern.

First, as shown in Figures 9-12 (1) to (3), during the period from when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol until 0.7 seconds have elapsed (the period from T1 to T2 shown in Figure 9-11), the effect control CPU 120 executes a uniform pseudo-variation effect (first unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 9-12 (3), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] on the image display device 5 (see Figure 9-28 described below).

Next, as shown in Figures 9-12 (4) to (6), during the period from 0.7 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the display of the second special symbol variation to 1.4 seconds after (the period from T2 to T3 shown in Figure 9-11), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a uniform pseudo-variation presentation (second unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 9-12 (6), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in Figures 9-12 (7) to 9-13 (9), during the period from 1.4 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol to 2.1 seconds after (the period from T3 to T4 shown in Figure 9-11), the effect control CPU 120 executes a uniform pseudo-variation effect (third unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 9-13 (9), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in Figures 9-13 (10) to (13), during the period from 2.1 seconds after CPU 103 starts the display of the changing second special symbols to 2.8 seconds after (the period from T4 to T5 shown in Figure 9-6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the uniform speed pseudo-changing effect, ends the pseudo-changing of the third decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes the display of the changing third decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and stops (stops display, confirms stop) the confirmed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "145") that results in a "miss." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "145") is confirmed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the third decorative pattern in a special manner when the third decorative pattern stops (stop display, confirmed stop), based on the fact that the third decorative pattern is actually being displayed to notify the display result of the change display, rather than a pseudo-change.

[Direct jackpot]
In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more, in the time-saving state a (i.e., "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") or the time-saving state b (i.e., "invincible RUSH"), if the result of the change display of the second special symbol is "jackpot", the change pattern of "direct jackpot" is executed.

The "direct jackpot" variation pattern is one in which the decorative symbols disappear after the variable display begins, and the variable display ends with the decorative symbols remaining hidden. In this variation pattern, when the variable display ends, the combination of small symbols that indicates the variable display result is a "jackpot" is confirmed and stopped (see Figure 9-14).

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7, which has a large winning opening, is equipped with a light-emitting device, and when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 and the time-saving state a (i.e., "Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH") or time-saving state b (i.e., "Invincible RUSH") is active, if a jackpot occurs based on the variable display result of the second special symbol being a "jackpot," the special variable winning ball device 7 can be made to emit light at a timing controlled to enter the jackpot game state.

＜Example of "Direct Big Hit"＞
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is a "direct big hit" will be explained using Figures 9-14.

Figure 9-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect images for each effect associated with the "direct big hit" variation pattern.

First, as shown in Figure 9-14 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "245") of the previously executed variable display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] on the image display device 5 (see Figure 9-28 described below).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-14 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special symbol (the variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories), the performance control CPU 120 erases the third decorative symbol from the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-14 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, erases the third decorative symbol and stops the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates a "jackpot" display result in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 (i.e., the symbol matching effect is not executed for the third decorative symbol). At this time, the active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently executing variable display is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-14 (4), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a jackpot round game start image. This jackpot round game start image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the text "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, a jackpot right-hit promotion image including the text "Aim for the attacker!!" to enter the jackpot into the jackpot slot and an arrow image indicating a right hit, and an ally character. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving mode is activated, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed frequently, and the display result is often determined to be a "small win," resulting in a big win. However, when the time-saving mode is activated and the display result is determined to be a "big win," the player feels disappointed that they would have won better in the normal mode.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is judged to be a "jackpot," and information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim for the attacker!!" (or "Aim for V!!" in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot)) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is illuminated to draw the player's attention from the image display device 5 to the big winning opening, thereby reducing the disappointment felt when a jackpot has occurred due to the display result being judged to be a "jackpot."

<Fluctuating patterns with normal reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern accompanying a normal reach (such as "high-speed normal reach miss" or "high-speed normal reach time-saving small hit") means that after the reach state is established, the final display result is confirmed and stopped without the super reach effects (challenge effects, fall effects, etc.) described below being executed.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns involving normal reach when the fluctuation display result is "miss," the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern is 3000 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that accompany a normal reach when the fluctuation display result is a "time-saving small win," the fluctuation display period is 7000 ms when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win."

<Fluctuating patterns with super reach>
In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a super reach ("Super reach A miss,""Super reach B miss,""Super reach C miss,""Super reach A small time-saving hit,""Super reach A big hit,""Super reach B normal small hit,""Super reach C small time-saving hit"), the final display result is confirmed and stopped by executing a super reach effect that notifies whether a "large hit,""small time-saving hit," or "normal small hit" has been won.

(Super Reach A (challenge effect))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving super reaches, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach A Miss,""Super Reach A Small Time-Shortening Win," and "Super Reach A Big Win," a reach state is established with the start of the variation display, and a Super Reach A effect (hereinafter referred to as a "challenge effect") is executed, in which an ally character performs the action of throwing a bomb at a rock to notify whether or not the ally character has won a "small time-shortening win" or a "big win." Here, if the final display result is a "miss," an effect in which the ally character fails the challenge (failure effect) is executed. In the failure effect, a failure symbol is statically displayed in the symbol display area. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-shortening win" or a "big win," an effect in which the ally character succeeds in the challenge (success effect) is executed (see Figure 9-58). In the failure effect, a big win symbol is statically displayed in the symbol display area (a symbol alignment effect is executed).

(Super Reach B (Fall-inducing performance))
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach B Miss" and "Super Reach B Normal Small Win" among the variation patterns accompanying the Super Reach, when the variation display starts, a fall suggestion display (in this example, an image including a triangular object containing an "!" and the word "WARNING") is displayed, and then a reach state is established, and by operating the push button 31B on the special symbol provisionally stopped in the symbol display area 5C (the special symbol of the word "END" indicating the end of the time-saving state), a Super Reach B effect (hereinafter referred to as a "fall-inducing effect" as appropriate) is executed, which notifies whether or not a "normal small win" has been won. Here, if the final display result is a "miss," the provisionally stopped special symbol is successfully destroyed, and an effect (fall-avoidance effect) is executed in which a losing symbol is confirmed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "normal small hit," the temporarily stopped special symbol fails to be destroyed, and an effect (a confirmed fall effect) is executed in which the special symbol is confirmed to stop in the symbol display area 5C (see Figure 9-61).

(Super Reach C (instant hit on button))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns accompanying the super reach, in the variation patterns of "Super reach C miss" and "Super reach C time-saving small win", the reach is not established after the variation display has started, and an operation prompt display imitating the push button 31B and a time bar to notify the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are displayed in each area of the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and each time the push button 31B is operated once, a decorative pattern is displayed stationary in each pattern display area (for example, the pattern display areas 5R → 5L → 5C are displayed stationary), and by operating the push button 31B a total of three times, a combination of decorative patterns is displayed stationary in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing a super reach C effect (hereinafter referred to as "button immediate win effect" as appropriate) that notifies whether or not the "time-saving small win" has been won.

If the final display result is a "miss," an effect (miss symbol effect) is executed in which a decorative symbol combination (miss symbol) that results in a "miss" final display result is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-saving win," an effect (match symbol effect) is executed in which a decorative symbol combination (odd number 7 symbol "777") that results in a "small time-saving win" final display result is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (not shown).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which Super Reach A to Super Reach C were provided as types of Super Reach, but this is not limited to this form, and types of Super Reach other than Super Reach A to Super Reach C may also be provided.

For example, suppose Super Reach D is provided as a Super Reach. Among the variation patterns accompanying Super Reach, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach D Miss," "Super Reach D Small Time-Shortening Hit," and "Super Reach D Big Hit," a reach state is established as soon as the variation display begins, and a Super Reach D effect (hereinafter referred to as "battle effect" as appropriate) is executed, which notifies whether or not the ally character has won a "small time-shortening hit" or a "big hit" as they battle an enemy character. Here, if the final display result is a "miss," an effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect). On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-shortening hit" or a "big hit," an effect is executed in which the ally character triumphs over the enemy character (victory effect). The ally characters appearing in this battle effect are associated with the ally characters of the movable body 02TM100, which will be described later.

Here, we will explain the fluctuation pattern determination during Dream Rush, Ultra-High-Speed Hyper Rush, and Invincible Rush (see Figure 9-25), which will be described later. Specifically, the following fluctuation pattern determination tables are pre-prepared: a [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "miss," a [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "jackpot," a [time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "time-saving small win," and a [normal small win] fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined that the fluctuation display result will be a "normal small win."

[For misses] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value from the range that the random number value MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns can take is assigned as the determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns: "long fluctuation miss," "high-speed miss," "high-speed normal reach miss," "super reach A miss," "super reach B miss," "ultra-high-speed miss," "super reach C miss," and "entry fluctuation miss."

[For jackpots] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value from the range that the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern: "Super Reach A Jackpot," "Invasion Fluctuating Jackpot," and "Direct Jackpot."

[For time-saving small wins] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value from the range that the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern: "high-speed time-saving small win," "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win," "super reach A time-saving small win," "entering fluctuation time-saving small win," "ultra-high-speed time-saving small win," and "super reach C time-saving small win."

[For normal small hits] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value from the range that the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 can take is assigned as the determination value for each fluctuation pattern: "Super Reach B normal small hit," "Rush fluctuation normal small hit," and "High-speed normal small hit."

In this embodiment, jackpots include symbol jackpots that occur directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and small jackpots that occur via V entry via small jackpots based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol. Therefore, different variable patterns are used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot." However, this is not limited to this form, and a common variable pattern may be used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [For 0 reserved items] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
9-15(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [time-saving state a (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2 in the time-saving state a, the presentation mode is controlled to "Dream Rush" (see FIG. 9-25). That is, FIG. 9-15(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [time-saving state a (Dream Rush)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 9-15 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "long fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, 701 to 800 are assigned to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 801 to 900 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 are assigned to the "super reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-15 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-15 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 500 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 501 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-15 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "Super Reach B normal small hits."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [for reserved 1 to 4] fluctuation pattern determination table>
9-16(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 pieces] in [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. That is, FIG. 9-16(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 pieces] in [a time-saving state (Dream Rush)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 9-16 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 800 are assigned to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 801 to 900 to the "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 to the "super reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-16 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-16 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 500 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 501 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-16 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "Super Reach B normal small hits."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3)], [1st fluctuation] fluctuation pattern determination table>
Figures 9-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first fluctuation in the time-saving mode a (jackpot occurrence count value = 3) in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 in the time-saving mode a, the presentation mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 9-25). That is, Figures 9-17 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first fluctuation in the time-saving mode a (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH) controlled for the first time after the first win in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 9-17 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "incoming fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-17 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "entering fluctuation jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-17 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "intrusive fluctuation time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-17 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "intrusion fluctuation normal small win" fluctuation pattern.

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000), [0 reserved]] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
Figures 9-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for "0 reserved balls" in the "time-saving mode a (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000)" in this embodiment. Note that when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3, the first fluctuation is excluded. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 in the "time-saving mode a," the presentation mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 9-25). That is, Figures 9-18 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for "0 reserved balls" in the "time-saving mode a (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)" in this embodiment (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3, the first fluctuation is excluded).

As shown in Figure 9-18 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "pseudo fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, 701 to 900 are assigned to the "ultra-high speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 are assigned to the "super reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-18 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-18 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach C time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-18 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "Super Reach B normal small hits."

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000), [reserved 1 to 4]] fluctuation pattern determination table>
Figures 9-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in the [time-saving mode a (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000)] in this embodiment. Note that the first fluctuation is excluded when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 in the time-saving mode a, the presentation mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see Figure 9-25). That is, Figures 9-19 (1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in the [time-saving mode a (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)] in this embodiment (the first fluctuation is excluded when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3).

As shown in Figure 9-19 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 900 are assigned to the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 975 are assigned to the "super reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 976 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-19 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-19 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the "Super Reach C time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-19 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for "Super Reach B normal small hits."

<[b Time-saving state] Fluctuation pattern determination table>
9-20(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the b time-saving state is in effect, the performance mode is controlled to "invincible rush" (see FIG. 9-25). That is, FIG. 9-20(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state (invincible rush) in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 9-20 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-20 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-20 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 9-20 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, values 1 to 997 are assigned to the "high-speed normal small hit" fluctuation pattern.

In this way, during the period when the gaming state is controlled to time-saving state a, when the jackpot occurrence count value is between 3 and 10,000 (above the mode switching judgment value), the probability that the "ultra-high speed non-reach miss" variation pattern, whose variation display period is shorter than 1,000 ms, is executed is approximately 80%. On the other hand, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (below the mode switching judgment value), the probability that the "ultra-high speed non-reach miss" variation pattern, whose variation display period is shorter than 1,000 ms, is executed is 0%. Therefore, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or greater than the mode switching judgment value of "3," the probability that the variation pattern, whose variation display period is shorter than 1,000 ms, is executed is higher than when the jackpot occurrence count value is less than the mode switching judgment value of "3."

[Post-win control table by game state]
FIG. 9-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a post-win control table for each game state in this embodiment. FIG. 9-21 (1) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "jackpot" when the game state is in the normal state, according to each display result (jackpot type). FIG. 9-21 (2) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "small win" when the game state is in the time-saving state A, according to each display result (small win type) and whether or not a V prize has occurred. FIG. 9-21 (3) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "small win" when the game state is in the time-saving state B, according to each display result (small win type) and whether or not a V prize has occurred.

As shown in Figure 9-21 (1), when the game state is normal,
(No. 1-1) If the display result is "3R normal jackpot", it will be controlled to the normal state after the jackpot,
(No. 1-2) If the display result is "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", it will be controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot,
(No. 1-3) If the display result is "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," the game will be controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot.

As shown in Figure 9-21 (2), when the game state is in a time-saving state,
(No. 2-1) If the display result is "normal small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit,
(No. 2-2) If the display result is "normal small hit" and a V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the big hit via the small hit.
(No. 2-3) If the display result is "time-limited small hit" and no V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit,
(No. 2-4) If the display result is a "time-shortened small hit" and a V prize occurs during the small hit, the machine will be controlled to a time-shortened state after a big hit via the small hit.

As shown in Figure 9-21 (3), when the game state is in the b time-saving state,
(No. 3-1) If the display result is "normal small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the b time reduction state after the small hit,
(No. 3-2) If the display result is "normal small hit" and a V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the big hit via the small hit.
(No. 3-3) If the display result is "time-limited small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit,
(No. 3-4) If the display result is a "time-shortened small hit" and a V prize occurs during the small hit, the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after a big hit via the small hit.

In this way, when the game state is in time-saving state a, the display result of (No. 2-1) will be "normal small win," and if no V win occurs during that small win, the game will be controlled to the normal state after that small win.On the other hand, when the game state is in time-saving state b, the display result of (No. 3-1) will be "normal small win," and if no V win occurs during that small win, the game will be controlled to the time-saving state b after that small win.

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (S113) in the special symbol process processing.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step S02TM1010).

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 102, and is set to the ON state when it is determined in the normal special symbol processing (S110) of FIG. 5 that the variable display result of the special symbol game is a "jackpot" and that the game should be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, the flag is cleared to the OFF state when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game.

If the jackpot flag is on (YES in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start presentation wait time (step S02TM1020) and proceeds to step S02TM1030. In the processing of step S02TM1020, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot start presentation wait time is set in a game control process timer located in a specified area of RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a jackpot start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1030), clears the jackpot flag to the OFF state (step S02TM1040), and proceeds to step S02TM1050.

In this embodiment, the jackpot start designation command is a command (jackpot fanfare command) that designates the display of a designation image indicating the start of a jackpot game state, and is included in the designation control command supplied from the main board 11 to the designation control board 12. In the jackpot start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the determination result of the jackpot type. In the processing of step S02TM1030, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the jackpot start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value, which is predetermined numerical data, by adding 1 (step S02TM1050), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (step S02TM1060), and then ends the processing.

In this embodiment, the jackpot occurrence count value as the predetermined numerical data is the value stored in the jackpot occurrence counter. The jackpot occurrence counter is provided in a predetermined area of RAM 102, and counts the number of times that it has been determined that control to a jackpot has occurred in that gaming state, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state, in a manner that allows identification.

In this example, the jackpot occurrence counter is initially set to an initial count value of "0," and is updated by adding "1" to the stored jackpot occurrence count value each time a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the number of times a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state, reaches a predetermined upper limit value (10,000 in this embodiment) (when limit is reached: jackpot occurrence count value = 10,000), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "0." Thereafter, the jackpot occurrence count value is incremented by "1" each time a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value was updated by adding 1, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot occurrence count value may also be updated by subtracting 1.

For example, the jackpot occurrence counter is initially set to an initial count value of "10,000," and is updated by subtracting "1" from the stored jackpot occurrence count value each time a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the number of times a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot gaming state, reaches a predetermined upper limit value (10,000 in this embodiment) (when the limit is reached: jackpot occurrence count value = 0), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "10,000." Thereafter, the jackpot occurrence count value is subtracted by "1" each time a decision is made to control to a jackpot, including the initial jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

Also, if the big hit flag is off in step S02TM1010 (NO in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is on (step S02TM1110).

In this embodiment, the small win flag is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 102, and is set to the ON state when it is determined in the normal special symbol processing (S110) of FIG. 5 that the variable display result of the special symbol game is a "small win" and that the game state is controlled to a small win. On the other hand, the flag is cleared to the OFF state when a small win symbol is displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game.

If the small win flag is off (NO in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (step S02TM1210) and ends the processing.

If the small win flag is on (YES in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 sets a wait time for the small win start effect (step S02TM1120) and proceeds to step S02TM1130. In the processing of step S02TM1120, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the wait time for the small win start effect is set in a game control process timer located in a specified area of RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a small win start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1130), clears the small win flag to the OFF state (step S02TM1140), updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (S118) (step S02TM1150), and then ends the processing.

In this embodiment, the small win start designation command is a command (small win fanfare command) that designates the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a small win game state, and is included in the presentation control command supplied from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. In the small win start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the small win type determination result. In the processing of step S02TM1130, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the small win start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the small win start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

[Jackpot end processing]
Figure 9-23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S117) in the special pattern process processing.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S02TM2010).

In this embodiment, when the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7" in the post-jackpot release processing (S116) of Figure 5, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot end presentation waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In the processing of step S02TM2010, the game control process timer value, which is the value stored in the game control process timer, is updated by subtracting 1, and it is determined whether the jackpot end presentation waiting time has elapsed depending on whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapse determination value ("0" in this embodiment).

If the waiting time for the jackpot end effect has not elapsed (NO in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 will simply end processing.

If the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed (YES in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value has reached a limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10,000"), which is a predetermined specific value corresponding to a predetermined upper limit value (in this example, 10,000 times) (step S02TM2020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value has reached the limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10,000") (YES in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the stored jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2030), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10,000") (NO in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type is a jackpot via a small jackpot (step S02TM2040).

In step S02TM2040, the data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 is referenced to determine whether the jackpot type is a jackpot via a small jackpot. In this example, it determines whether the jackpot type is either a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small jackpot" or a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot."

If, in the processing of step S02TM2040, the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is a jackpot via a small jackpot (YES in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the small jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot in question is a "normal small jackpot" (step S02TM2050).

If the small win type corresponding to the jackpot is a "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2100), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the type of small win corresponding to the big win is not a "normal small win" (NO in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM2060.

If, in the processing of step S02TM2040, the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is not a jackpot via a small jackpot (NO in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type is a "3R symbol normal jackpot" (step S02TM2080).

If the jackpot type is a "3R regular jackpot" (YES in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2090), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot type is not a "3R regular jackpot" (NO in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM2060.

If step S02TM2050 returns NO, or if step S02TM2080 returns NO, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag corresponding to the type of jackpot in question (step S02TM2060), sets the time-saving count counter to "10000" as the initial count value (step S02TM2070), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

In this embodiment, a time-saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for controlling the game to a time-saving state are met. There are two types of time-saving flags: time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B. In the following explanation, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The a-time reduction flag is set when the game is in the a-time reduction state after a jackpot: a "10Ra time reduction jackpot" that occurs during normal mode, a "10Ra time reduction jackpot via time reduction small jackpot" that occurs during the a-time reduction state, or a "10Ra time reduction jackpot via time reduction small jackpot" that occurs during the b-time reduction state. This a-time reduction flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the a-time reduction state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the a-time reduction state, when the time reduction control ends for the specified number of times (10,000 times) and the game is controlled to normal mode, etc.).

The b time-saving flag is set when the game is controlled to the b time-saving state after a "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot" that occurs during normal play. This b time-saving flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the b time-saving state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the b time-saving state, when the time-saving control ends for the specified number of times (10,000 times) and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

After processing step S02TM2030, step S02TM2070, step S02TM2090, or step S02TM2100, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (step S02TM2110), and then ends processing.

In this way, even in the irregular case where a V win occurs during a "normal small hit" and control is placed into a jackpot gaming state, by determining YES in step S02TM2050 during the jackpot end processing and skipping the process of setting the time-saving flag (step S02TM2060), it is possible to place the game in the normal state after the jackpot gaming state without being placed into the time-saving state.

Also, if step S02TM2080 returns YES and a process to clear the jackpot occurrence counter (step S02TM2090) is executed, and if a "3R regular jackpot" occurs during normal operation, control will be restored to normal operation after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot occurrence count value will be initialized at the end of the jackpot. Also, if step S02TM2050 returns YES and a process to clear the jackpot occurrence counter (step S02TM2100) is executed, and if a "10Ra jackpot via regular small jackpot" occurs, control will be restored to normal operation after the jackpot ends, and the jackpot occurrence count value will be initialized at the end of the jackpot.

[Small hit end processing]
Figure 9-24 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special pattern process processing.

First, the CPU 103 updates the V prize validity period timer by subtracting 1 (step S02TM3010), and checks whether the V prize validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (step S02TM3020).

If the V prize validity period timer has not timed out (NO in step S02TM3020), the CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag, which is set when a V prize is detected, has already been set (step S02TM3030).

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning switch 87a is in the ON state (step S02TM3040) to determine whether a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a gaming ball enters the V winning area 870 during the valid V winning period.

If the V winning switch is not in the ON state (NO in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the V winning switch is in the ON state (YES in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag to indicate that a V winning has been detected during the valid V winning period (step S02TM3050).

Then, the CPU 103 performs processing to send a V winning designation command (step S02TM3060) and ends the processing. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

If the V winning validity period timer has timed out in step S02TM3020, the CPU 103 performs processing to send a small win end command (step S02TM3070). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended.

Next, the CPU 103 changes the state of the solenoid 22 to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to an open state (step S02TM3080).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V prize flag is set (step S02TM3090).

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines that a jackpot has occurred and sets the jackpot flag (step S02TM3100).

Next, the CPU 103 officially stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small win stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the determination that a V win has resulted in a legitimate jackpot (step S02TM3110).

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value, which is predetermined numerical data, by adding 1 (step S02TM3120), and temporarily resets the time-saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3130).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, during the small win end process executed when the small win gaming state ends, if a V win has occurred, the jackpot occurrence count value, which serves as predetermined numerical data, is updated by incrementing it by 1 (step S02TM3120). However, this is not limited to this, and during the small win release process executed when controlled to the small win gaming state, if a V win has occurred, the jackpot occurrence count value, which serves as predetermined numerical data, may be updated by incrementing it by 1.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value was updated by adding 1, but this is not limited to this form, and the jackpot occurrence count value may also be updated by subtracting 1. This can be achieved using a method similar to that shown in step S02TM1050, so explanation will be omitted.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in step S02TM3110 (step S02TM3140). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that the jackpot game state has begun.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot control timer to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (e.g., the time during which the image display device 5 notifies the user that a jackpot has occurred) (step S02TM3150).

Next, the CPU 103 references the jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 and sets opening pattern data indicating opening modes such as the number of openings (e.g., 3 times, 10 times, etc.), opening time (e.g., 29 seconds), and interval time (time the jackpot opening is closed between rounds) in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 according to the type of jackpot (step S02TM3160). Of this data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening count counter for counting the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release processing (S114) (step S02TM3170) and ends the processing. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot gaming state, the game transitions to the jackpot gaming state.

If the V prize flag is not set in step S02TM3090 (NO in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines whether the b time-saving flag is set among the time-saving flags (step S02TM3180).

If the b time-saving flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is not set, that is, if a V prize does not occur on a small win that occurred during the a time-saving state or normal state, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

On the other hand, if the b time-saving flag is set (YES in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win type of the small win is a "normal small win" (step S02TM3190).

If the small hit type is a "normal small hit" (YES in step S02TM3190), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is set and a small hit whose small hit type is a "time-saving small hit" has not resulted in a V win, i.e., if a time-saving small hit that occurred during the b time-saving state has not resulted in a V win, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

If step S02TM3180 returns a NO result, or if step S02TM3190 returns a NO result, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3200), clears the time-saving count counter, and initializes the time-saving count value to "0" (step S02TM3210), clears the jackpot occurrence counter, and initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM3220), and proceeds to step S02TM3230.

If step S02TM3190 returns YES, or after processing step S02TM3220, the CPU 103 erases the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 (step S02TM3230), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (step S02TM3240), and ends processing. As a result, if no V win occurs in the small jackpot gaming state, the game does not transition to the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, if the V winning flag is not set, the b time-saving flag is set, and the small win type is a "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM3180 → YES in step S02TM3190), that is, if a normal small win that occurs during the b time-saving state does not result in a V winning, by skipping the series of processes in steps S02TM3200 to S02TM3210 that reset the time-saving flag and clear the time-saving count counter, it is possible to continue controlling the b time-saving state without being controlled (falling) back to the normal state even if a normal small win occurs during the b time-saving state.

[Game flow]
Next, a game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag described later are not set is set to [normal mode]. The game state is controlled to either the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the first flag described later is set is set to [Dream Rush]. The game state is controlled to either the time-saving state b (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the second flag described later is set is set to [Invincible Rush]. The game state is controlled to either the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), and the presentation mode when the third flag described later is set is set to [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush] (see FIG. 9-25).

In the example game flow shown in Figure 9-25, a jackpot occurs when the presentation mode is [normal mode], and after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to either normal mode, time-saving mode a, or time-saving mode b. If controlled to normal mode, the game transitions to [normal mode]; if controlled to time-saving mode a, the game transitions to [Dream Rush]; and if controlled to time-saving mode b, the game transitions to [Invincible Rush].

In this game flow, explanation of irregular situations during the game will be omitted. Examples of irregular situations during the game include:
・A situation in which a jackpot or small jackpot occurs on special chart 2 during normal mode ・A situation in which a V prize is awarded with a small jackpot that occurs during normal mode ・A situation in which a jackpot or small jackpot occurs on special chart 1 during time-saving mode ・A situation in which a V prize is awarded with a normal small jackpot ・A situation in which a V prize is not awarded with a time-saving small jackpot ・A situation in which the display result is "miss" for all variable displays over 10,000 time-saving times ・A situation in which the number of jackpots occurs is 10,000 times, etc. These specific examples of irregular situations are merely examples, and other situations not listed here are also included.

(1) <Normal time>
The CPU 120 for effect control sets the effect mode to "normal mode" when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and none of the first flag, second flag, and third flag is set.

(2) ＜First Hit＞
In the state (1) described above, when a variable display that shows a "jackpot" is executed, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types for the first special symbol include (2A) a "3R symbol normal jackpot," (2B) a "3Ra symbol time-saving jackpot," and (2C) a "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot."

(2A) → (1)
When the jackpot type is "3R normal jackpot", and the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (1).

(2B) → (3)
When the jackpot type is "pattern 3Ra time-saving jackpot" and the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (3).

(2C) → (4)
When the jackpot type is "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", and the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (4).

(3) <a time reduction 10,000 times>
The CPU 120 for effect control controls the game state to a time-shortened state (low probability/high base state), the first flag is set, and the effect mode when 10,000 variable displays are executed is set to [Dream Rush].

(4) <b time reduction 10,000 times>
The CPU 120 for effect control controls the game state to the b time-shortening state (low probability/high base state), the second flag is set, and the effect mode is set to [Invincible Rush] when 10,000 variable displays are executed.

(5) <Jackpot>
In the state of (3) or (4) described above, or in the state of (7) described below, when the display result in any of the variable displays becomes a "jackpot" or a "time-saving small hit," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (including a jackpot game state via a small hit). In this embodiment, when the display result becomes a "jackpot," the jackpot type of the second special symbol is a "10Ra time-saving jackpot," and when the display result becomes a "time-saving small hit," the jackpot type via a small hit of the second special symbol is a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small hit."

(5) → (3)
When the jackpot ends in a case where the number of jackpot occurrences is "2", the state is controlled to (3).

(5) → (7)
When the jackpot ends in a case where the number of jackpot occurrences is "3" or more ("3" to "10000"), the state is controlled to (7).

(7) <a time reduction 10,000 times>
The CPU 120 for effect control controls the game state to a time-shortened state (low probability/high base state), the third flag is set, and the effect mode when 10,000 variable displays are executed is set to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(6) <Falling small hit>
In the above-mentioned state (3) or (7), when the display result in either of the variable displays becomes "normal small win," the game is controlled to a small win game state. In this embodiment, in a small win game when the display result becomes "normal big win," the opening pattern of the V-determined winning device 87 is the first opening pattern, and it is extremely difficult to make the game ball enter the V-determined winning device 87, and it is virtually impossible to generate a big win.

(6) → (1)
If the small hit type is a "normal small hit" and the small hit ends without a V winning occurring, the state will be controlled to (1).

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag in this embodiment will be described.

<First flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the time-saving state a after the jackpot ends (such as a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" or "a time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot") occurs, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Also, it is assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 1 or 2. After the jackpot game state ends, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 and the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a, the presentation control CPU 120 sets the first flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time the game state is controlled to the time-saving state A and the end of the 10,000th variable display at which the display result becomes "miss," and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the first flag.

Furthermore, when the 10,000th variable display, in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state), ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start win that occurred during the period up until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and if a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot, or if the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the first flag.

<Second flag>
When a jackpot of a type that is controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot ends (such as a "10Rb time-saving jackpot") occurs, the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. When the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, the performance control CPU 120 sets the second flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time when the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state and the time when the display result becomes "miss" after the 10,000th variable display, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the second flag.

Furthermore, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Variable displays based on the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start win that occurred during the period up to the end of the 10,000th variable display are executed, and if a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot, or if the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the second flag.

<Third Flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the a-time shortening state after the jackpot ends (such as an a-time shortening jackpot via a time shortening small jackpot) occurs, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. Also, it is assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 3 or more. After the jackpot game state ends, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more and the game state is controlled to the a-time shortening state, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a third flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time the game state is controlled to the time-saving state A and the end of the 10,000th variable display at which the display result becomes "miss," and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the third flag.

Furthermore, when the 10,000th variable display, in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state), ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable displays whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to the start win that occurred during the period up until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and if a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot, or if the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (up to four in this example) for that period, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the third flag.

[Performance mode]
As shown in Figure 9-25, in this example, the presentation modes are "Normal Mode,""DreamRush,""InvincibleRush," and "Super High Speed Hyper Rush." Among the presentation modes in this embodiment, presentation examples of "Dream Rush,""InvincibleRush," and "Super High Speed Hyper Rush" will be described below.

<Dream Rush>
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to a time-saving state or a normal state and the first flag is set, the presentation mode is set to [Dream Rush] (hereinafter referred to as "[Dream Rush] mode" as appropriate) (see FIG. 9-25(3)). FIG. 9-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush].

As shown in Figures 9-26 (1) to (4), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first logo display (in this example, the words "Dream Rush") in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the effect mode is "Dream Rush." The effect control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "Right Hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to win in the second start winning slot.

(Display of decorative symbols in [Dream Rush])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush] are composed of number symbols representing numbers, etc., and are composed of blue even number symbols (number symbols corresponding to the numbers "2,""4," and "6"), red odd number symbols excluding the number "7" (number symbols corresponding to the numbers "1,""3," and "5"), and a gold odd number symbol of the number "7" (number symbol corresponding to the number "7"). Hereinafter, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush] will be referred to as "first decorative symbols" as appropriate. Note that the first decorative symbols may be composed of number symbols and a base symbol, which will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush], the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed by scrolling the first decorative symbol vertically in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Vertical scrolling is a scrolling display from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen. When this scrolling display is being executed, the visibility of the decorative symbol is significantly reduced, and in this example, it is considered to be virtually impossible to see the decorative symbol.

In addition, when the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the [Dream Rush] mode, the size of the first decorative symbol will not change between the start and end of the variation.

(Example of the display of changing decorative symbols in [Dream Rush])
As shown in Figure 9-26 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the combination of the first fixed decorative symbols (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays one second hold display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E, and does not display the active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-26 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, which results in a "miss," the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a new normal active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently active variable display in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-26 (3), at the timing when the first decorative symbol in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-26 (4), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "412") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

(First logo display in [Dream Rush])
In this embodiment, a first logo cyclical change effect can be executed, in which the first logo display changes at a predetermined cycle to highlight the name of the currently controlled effect mode. The first logo cyclical change effect is an effect in which the first logo display changes in a predetermined direction.

As shown in Figure 9-27 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the first logo cyclical change effect, it causes the first logo display (the letters "Dream Rush") to light up from the left edge of the first logo display to the right edge at a predetermined cycle. The cycle for changing the first logo cyclical change effect is set to 5 seconds. In this way, by causing the first logo display to light up from the left edge to the right edge, interest in the effect is increased during [Dream Rush], and it also suggests a right hit to win the second start winning slot.

(First system display in [Dream Rush])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled by [Dream Rush], a right-hit promotion image (the letters "right hit" and an arrow image) is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting winning slot, but this is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Dream Rush], an image other than the right-hit promotion image may be always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting winning slot.

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], the first system display may be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotional image for winning the second starting winning slot. The first system display is a moving image that includes the words "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second starting winning slot, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The periodic interval of the operation of the first system display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

(First rotation display in [Dream Rush])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled by [Dream Rush], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed as still images of round objects, but this is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Dream Rush], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display format different from the still image of a round object.

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed as moving images of round objects performing a rotating motion. The second pending display and active display performing a rotating motion in this case are referred to as the first rotation-compatible display. The rotation period of this first rotation-compatible display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

<Invincible RUSH>
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state or the normal state and the second flag is set, the presentation mode is set to [Invincible Rush] (hereinafter referred to as the “[Invincible Rush] mode” as appropriate) (see Figure 9-25 (4)).

Based on the fact that the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush], the presentation control CPU 120 displays a caption containing the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left corners of the screen of the image display device 5 (the background image of [Invincible Rush]). The presentation control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "Right Hit" and an arrow image that indicates a right hit to win in the second start winning slot.

(Display of decorative symbols in [Invincible Rush])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush] are composed of the same number symbols as the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush]. However, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush] are displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 in a smaller size than the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush] (see Figures 9-55 and 9-56). Hereinafter, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush] will be referred to as "second decorative symbols" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush], the second decorative symbol is displayed by scrolling vertically in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2, similar to the display of the first decorative symbol when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush]. Note that when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush], the second decorative symbol may be updated or transformed or enlarged/reduced in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2.

<Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH>
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a or the normal state and the third flag is set, the presentation mode is set to [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH] (hereinafter referred to as "Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH mode" as appropriate) (see FIG. 9-25(7)). FIG. 9-28 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH].

As shown in Figures 9-28 (1) to (4), the effect control CPU 120 displays a second logo display (in this example, the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH") in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the effect mode being "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH." The effect control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "Right Hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to win in the second start winning slot.

(Display of decorative symbols in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH," the decorative symbols are composed of number symbols, such as numbers, and base symbols corresponding to the shape of the number symbols. Furthermore, among the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the central decorative symbol (symbol display area 5C) displays a light ray effect display from between the base symbol and the number symbol (in this example, behind the center of the number symbol) to the screen frame. The light ray effect display is an image with a higher display priority than the base symbol. Furthermore, the number symbol is an image with a higher display priority than the light ray effect display. Therefore, to the player, the number symbol, the light ray effect display, and the base symbol appear to be displayed in this order. Hereinafter, the decorative symbol when the presentation mode is "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" will be referred to as the "third decorative symbol" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative symbol is enlarged/reduced in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this embodiment, the variable display (enlargement/reduction) of the third decorative symbol is performed in the following order: (1) → (2) → (3).

(1) When the variable display begins, the third decorative pattern that was fixed and stopped in accordance with the display result of the variable display executed immediately before is enlarged and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: large)" as appropriate). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced, and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, the display color of the third decorative pattern (blue, red, gold) is changed to white, thereby reducing the visibility of the third decorative pattern. Note that a configuration that allows the transmittance of the third decorative pattern to be changed may be adopted, and the visibility of the third decorative pattern may be reduced by setting the layer transmittance to a value other than 0% when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed.

(2) Next, the third decorative symbol that was previously enlarged is displayed in a reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative symbol at this time will be referred to as the "third decorative symbol (size: small)" as appropriate). The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of third decorative symbols that corresponds to the display result of the variable display. Also, as with the enlarged display of the third decorative symbols, the visibility of the third decorative symbol is reduced, and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the visibility of the third decorative symbol is reduced by changing the display color of the third decorative symbol (blue, red, gold) to white and reducing the size of the third decorative symbol. By reducing the visibility of the third decorative symbol in this way, even if a combination of third decorative symbols corresponding to the display result of the variable display is displayed in the state (2), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the display result of the variable display at this timing.

(3) Next, the third decorative pattern that was previously displayed in a reduced size is displayed as a static display in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: medium)" as appropriate). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is improved, and a light effect display is displayed. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is displayed as a static display, the display color of the third decorative pattern is changed from white to one of the colors (blue, red, gold), thereby improving the visibility of the third decorative pattern.

In this example, when enlarged/reduced display is being performed, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases in terms of its display size and color, but it is still possible to view it.

(Example of the display of changing decorative symbols in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
As shown in Figure 9-28 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the final third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays one second hold display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E, and does not display the active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-28 (2), when the CPU 103 begins the variable display of the second special symbol, which results in a "miss," the performance control CPU 120 begins the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative symbol to white and erases the light effect display. The third decorative symbol combination at this time is the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "245") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "miss").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a new normal active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently active variable display in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-28 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "412") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display (in this example, "miss").

Next, as shown in Figure 9-28 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-28 (5), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, fixes and stops the fixed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it fixes and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "412") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

As shown in Figure 9-26 (2), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [Dream Rush], there are times when the decorative symbols become invisible from the start to the end of the variable display. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 9-28 (2) to (5), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush], there are no times when the decorative symbols become invisible from the start to the end of the variable display, and they can be seen at any time.

(Second logo display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, a second logo cyclical change effect can be executed, in which the second logo display changes at a predetermined cycle to highlight the name of the currently controlled effect mode. The second logo cyclical change effect is an effect in which the second logo display changes in a predetermined direction.

As shown in Figure 9-27 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the second logo cyclical change effect, it causes the second logo display (the letters "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH") to light up from the left edge of the second logo display to the right edge at a predetermined cycle. The cycle of change in the second logo cyclical change effect is set to 0.5 seconds. In this way, by causing the second logo display to light up from the left edge to the right edge, interest in the effect is increased during the "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" and a right hit is suggested to win the second starting winning slot.

(Second system display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled in [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], a right-hit promotion image (the letters "Right hit" and an arrow image) is constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting winning slot. However, this is not limited to this form, and when controlled in [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], an image other than the right-hit promotion image may be constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second starting winning slot.

For example, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], a second system display may be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotional image for winning the second start winning slot. The second system display is a moving image that includes the words "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning slot, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The periodic interval of the operation of the second system display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

(Displays the second rotation in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled by [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed as still images of round objects, but this is not limited to this form, and when controlled by [Ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], the second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display format different from the still images of round objects.

For example, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], a second hold display corresponding to the second hold memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed as moving images of circular objects performing a rotating motion. The second hold display and active display performing a rotating motion in this case are referred to as a second rotation-compatible display. The rotation cycle of this second rotation-compatible display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

[Featured items]
In this embodiment, a movable body 02TM100, which is a role prop, is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The movable body 02TM100 operates between an initial position, an intermediate performance position (a position where a part of the movable body is exposed), and a maximum performance position (a position where the entire movable body is exposed) according to the control of the performance control board 12. Hereinafter, the intermediate performance position and the maximum performance position will be referred to as "performance positions" as appropriate.

For example, the movable body 02TM100 may move from the initial position to the intermediate performance position to the initial position, or from the initial position to the maximum performance position to the initial position, or from the initial position to the intermediate performance position to the maximum performance position to the initial position, or from the maximum performance position to the intermediate performance position to the initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 9-29, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is not positioned in front of the image display device 5. In other words, in this embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and is configured not to affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the performance position (intermediate performance position, maximum performance position) or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the performance position, the movable body 02TM100 is positioned in front of the image display device 5. That is, in this embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the performance position or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the performance position, it overlaps with the area of the image display device 5, affecting the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In this example, when the first change performance described below is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the intermediate performance position, and when the second change performance described below is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the maximum performance position. Hereinafter, the performance in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate performance position → initial position will be referred to as an "intermediate performance" as appropriate, and the performance in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → maximum performance position → initial position will be referred to as a "maximum performance" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body 02TM100 has a regular hexagonal shape that includes a design that resembles an ally character. The ally character of this movable body 02TM100 is a character that is the same as the ally character that appears in the super reach effect (in this example, the super reach A effect).

In addition, a movable body LED may be provided on the movable body 02TM100, and a light-emitting effect may be performed in which the movable body LED emits white light when moving from the initial position to the effect position, or at a predetermined timing while in the effect position (for example, when the push button 31B is operated). Furthermore, multiple different light-emitting effect modes may be provided. For example, in addition to the effect mode in which the movable body LED provided on the movable body 02TM100 emits white light, there may also be an effect mode in which it emits red light.

[Logo panel]
In this embodiment, a logo panel 02TM110 is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The logo panel displays the characters "XXX" (such as the name of the gaming machine), and the "XXX" character portion of the logo panel is illuminated.

<Positional relationship between props and logo panel>
In this embodiment, the logo panel 02TM110 is disposed in front of (toward the player) the movable body 02TM100. As shown in FIG. 9-29(1), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is located behind (toward the gaming machine) the logo panel 02TM110, and therefore its visibility to the player is reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 9-29 (2A), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate performance position, a portion of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, approximately the bottom two-thirds of the movable body) is located below the area where the logo panel 02TM110 is located, and is therefore visible to the player. Also, as shown in Figure 9-29 (2B), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the maximum performance position, the entire movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the entire movable body) is located below the area where the logo panel 02TM110 is located, and is therefore visible to the player.

In this way, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate presentation position, only a portion of the ally character on the movable body is visible to the player. On the other hand, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the maximum presentation position, all of the ally character on the movable body is visible to the player.

[Transformation effects]
In this embodiment, a change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of the start winning. The change effect is an example of a preview effect in which the corresponding display (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of determination at the time of the start winning is displayed in either a blue form (in this example, a blue round display) or a red form (in this example, a red round display) that is different from the normal form (in this example, a white round display).

Specifically, among the change effects, the hold change effect, which displays the display mode of the hold display in a different display mode from the normal mode (either blue or red), is a pre-read preview effect that suggests the display result of the hold memory whose execution is on hold. Furthermore, among the change effects, the active change effect, which displays the display mode of the active display in a different display mode from the normal mode (either blue or red), is a preview effect during change that suggests the display result of the executed change display. The timing of the execution of the change effects and the change patterns of the hold display are explained in detail in Figures 9-39 (B1) to 9-40 (B4) described below. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the change effects that can be executed are a first change effect, a second change effect, and a third change effect, each with different presentation modes.

<First transformation effect>
The first change effect is a series of effects consisting of (1A) to (1D) shown below.
(1A) A change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wave-like effect display") is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. (1B) An intermediate action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate action position → initial position. (1C) A character appearance effect in which a character related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (1D) A first action change effect in which an ally character changes the display mode of a corresponding display (active display, pending display) by throwing a bomb at the corresponding display.

In (1D), the effect in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is referred to as the "first action effect," and the effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display onto which the bomb is thrown changes is referred to as the "first corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 9-38) described below and the effect mode determination table for the change effect (see Figure 9-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, but the first change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed tend to have shorter variable display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Since it is difficult to secure the period for executing the first variable effect in the time-saving state, a configuration is adopted in which the first variable effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

However, this is not limited to this configuration. A configuration may be adopted in which the first change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed, the first change effect may be executed over multiple change displays to ensure a period of time for executing the first change effect.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, after a change precursor effect is executed, an intermediate action effect, a character appearance effect, and a first action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, this is not limited to this form. After a change precursor effect is executed, an intermediate action effect, a character appearance effect, and a first action change effect may be executed at a rate different from 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display may not change.

For example, if the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), a process is performed to determine whether to execute a false change sign effect, in which only the change sign effect is executed and no intermediate action effect or later of the first change effect is executed. At this time, a decision is made to execute the false change sign effect 3% of the time, and a decision is made not to execute the false change sign effect 97% of the time.

(Example of the first transformation effect)
9-30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image of each effect related to the first change effect. In this example, when the first special symbol is being displayed in the normal state, the first change effect is executed.

First, as shown in Figure 9-30 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-30 (2), one second after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the (1A) change precursor effect of the first change effect, and displays the wave effect display 02TM200 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 in its initial position.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-30 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1A) change precursor performance of the first change performance, erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1B) intermediate movement performance of the first change performance, displaying the blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the intermediate performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the (1B) intermediate action effect of the first transformation effect, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1C) character appearance effect of the first transformation effect, displaying an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the intermediate effect position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-30 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the (1C) character appearance presentation of the first transformation presentation, erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1D) first action transformation presentation of the first transformation presentation, displaying the ally character 02TM30C throwing a bomb at the active display 02TM03 in the normal state in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-30 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation, causing the ally character 02TM30C to disappear from the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displaying the first action effect display 02TM211 in the active display area 02TM03E. This first action effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03 and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if only the first action effect display is being displayed.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-31 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first effect change presentation of the first change presentation, displays the ally character 02TM30A in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, erases the first effect effect display 02TM211 from the active display area 02TM03E, and changes the normal active display 02TM03 to the blue active display 02TM03B.

<Second transformation effect>
The second change effect is a series of effects consisting of (2A) to (2D) shown below.
(2A) A change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wave-like effect display") is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. (2B) A maximum movement effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → maximum movement position → initial position. (2C) A character appearance effect in which a character related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (2D) A second action change effect in which an ally character changes the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) by throwing three bombs at the corresponding display.

In (2D), the effect in which an ally character throws three bombs at a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is called the "second action effect," and the effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display onto which the three bombs have been thrown changes is called the "second corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 9-38) described below and the effect mode determination table for the change effect (see Figure 9-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the second change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, but the second change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed tend to have shorter variable display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Since it is difficult to secure the period for executing the second variation effect in the time-saving state, a configuration is adopted in which the second variation effect cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

However, this is not limited to this configuration. A configuration may be adopted in which the second change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, and a configuration may be adopted in which the second change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the second change effect can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed, the second change effect may be executed over multiple change displays to ensure a period of time for executing the second change effect.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, after a change precursor effect is executed, a maximum action effect, a character appearance effect, and a second action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, this is not limited to this form. After a change precursor effect is executed, a maximum action effect, a character appearance effect, and a second action change effect may be executed at a rate different from 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display may not change.

For example, if the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), a process is performed to determine whether to execute a false change sign effect, in which only the change sign effect is executed and no effects from the maximum movement effect onwards of the second change effect are executed. At this time, a decision is made to execute the false change sign effect 3% of the time, and a decision is made not to execute the false change sign effect 97% of the time.

(Example of the second transformation)
9-32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect image of each effect related to the second change effect. In this example, when the first special symbol is being displayed in the normal state, the second change effect is executed.

First, as shown in Figure 9-32 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-32 (2), one second after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 executes the (2A) change precursor effect of the first change effect, and displays the wave effect display 02TM200 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 in its initial position.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-32 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2A) change precursor performance of the second change performance, erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2B) maximum movement performance of the second change performance, displaying the blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the maximum performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (4), the effect control CPU 120 ends the (2B) maximum movement effect of the second transformation effect, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2C) character appearance effect of the second transformation effect, displaying an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the maximum transformation position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-32 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the (2C) character appearance presentation of the second transformation presentation, erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2D) second action transformation presentation of the first transformation presentation, displaying the ally character 02TM30C throwing three bombs at the active display 02TM03 in the normal state in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-32 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation, causing the ally character 02TM30C to disappear from the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displaying the second action effect display 02TM212 in the active display area 02TM03E. This second action effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03 and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if only the second action effect display is being displayed. Furthermore, the second action effect display is an image that is larger than the first action effect display.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-33 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second effect change presentation of the second change presentation, displays the ally character 02TM30A in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, erases the second effect effect display 02TM212 from the active display area 02TM03E, and changes the normal active display 02TM03 to the red active display 02TM03R.

In this way, the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation is executed in a manner that is more emphasized than the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and the size of the action effect display displayed in the active display area.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second transformation effect was emphasized more than the first transformation effect in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and the size of the action effect displayed in the active display area, but this is not limited to this form, and the second transformation effect may be emphasized more than the first transformation effect using other methods.

For example, the first transformation effect may be performed with a white background image while the second transformation effect is performed with a red background image, thereby emphasizing the second transformation effect more than the first transformation effect in terms of the background image (red > white).

Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which a small ally character is displayed when the first transformation effect is performed, and a large ally character that is larger in display size than the small ally character is displayed when the second transformation effect is performed, the second transformation effect may be emphasized more than the first transformation effect in terms of the display size of the ally character (large ally character > small ally character).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the corresponding display (hold display or active display) could be displayed in two different display modes, a blue mode or a red mode, which differ from the normal mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the corresponding display could be displayed in fewer than two different display modes, or in three or more different display modes which differ from the normal mode.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the corresponding display can be displayed in three or more display modes different from the normal mode, the corresponding display may be displayed in four display modes different from the normal mode: blue mode, red mode, green mode, or gold mode. In this case, the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of blue mode < green mode < red mode < gold mode.

<Third transformation effect>
The third change effect is an effect in which the corresponding display (hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a manner different from the normal manner at (i) the timing when the nth hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the hold display area (the timing of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the hold display corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position in the variable ranking in the hold display area (towards the active display area) (when n≧2), and (iii) the timing when the hold display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to the start winning is displayed).

The third change effect includes (i) an effect in which, at the timing of a start winning, the pending display corresponding to that start winning is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, and an effect in which the display mode of the pending display changes at the shift timing of (ii) or (iii). Furthermore, the third change effect does not include an effect (hereinafter referred to as an "action effect") in which, like the first and second change effects, the display mode is changed by acting on the corresponding display (for example, an ally character throwing a bomb) while the special pattern (the corresponding decorative pattern) is being displayed in a changing state (hereinafter referred to as an "action effect" as appropriate).

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 9-38) described below and the effect mode determination table for the change effect (see Figure 9-41) described below, a configuration is adopted that allows the third change effect to be executed whether a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed or a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving states (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variation display of the second special pattern is mainly executed tend to have extremely short variation display periods, making it difficult to secure a period in the time-saving states to execute a variation display accompanied by an action display (first variation display, second variation display). However, it is easy to secure a period in the time-saving states to execute a third variation display without an action display. Therefore, a configuration is adopted in which the third variation display can be executed whether the variation display corresponding to the first special pattern or the variation display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

However, this is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the third change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed, and a configuration in which the third change effect cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

[Preview preview effect]
In this embodiment, a preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview effect includes a preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-read preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As the pre-read preview effect, in addition to the above-mentioned hold change effect, a first pre-read effect and a second pre-read effect can be executed.

<First preview performance>
In this embodiment, the first pre-reading effect can be executed based on the result of the determination at the time of the start winning. The first pre-reading effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display that was the subject of the determination at the time of the start winning is a "small time-saving win" by using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The first pre-reading effect is a series of effects consisting of (A) and (B) shown below.
(A) In the <variable display where the first look-ahead counter = 2>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the letters "HOLD") is superimposed on the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 5L, and this decorative pattern is fixed (the numerical pattern is not updated), a first look-ahead A performance. (B) In the <variable display where the first look-ahead counter = 1>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the letters "HOLD") is superimposed on the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C, and these decorative patterns are fixed (the numerical pattern is not updated), a first look-ahead B performance. The first look-ahead counter will be described in detail later in Figure 9-38.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols fixed in the first pre-read A performance and the decorative symbols fixed in the first pre-read B performance are decorative symbols that include a common number symbol. Therefore, when the variable display subject to the preview is executed, the variable display is configured to start with a reach state established in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C.

If it is decided to execute this first look-ahead effect during the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 9-38), then in the variable display executed when the first look-ahead counter = 1, a decorative symbol of the same type as the decorative symbol fixed in the first look-ahead A effect will be determined as the confirmed decorative symbol to be stopped in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C. By doing this, the decorative symbols fixed in the first look-ahead A effect and the first look-ahead B effect will be the same type, and a reach state can be achieved in the variable display that is the subject of the preview.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the preview is determined to be a "small time-saving hit," a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading effect in the variable display that is the subject of the preview will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing this, the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading effect and the decorative pattern that is finally confirmed and stopped in the variable display that is the subject of the preview can be the same type of decorative pattern, thereby achieving appropriate performance control as a pre-reading preview effect using decorative patterns.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the prediction is judged to be a "miss," a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance in the variable display that is the subject of the prediction will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5L, 5C, and a decorative pattern of a different type from the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5R.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the first pre-reading effect was executed as a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area, but this is not limited to this form, and an effect different from the first pre-reading effect may be executed as a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area.

For example, as a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, a symbol enlargement effect in which the decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R become larger may be executed, thereby suggesting whether the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being previewed is a "small time-saving win."

As a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, a symbol destruction effect in which the decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are destroyed (torn apart) may be executed, thereby suggesting whether the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being previewed is a "small time-saving win."

(Example of the first look-ahead effect)
Figures 9-34 and 9-35 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of presentation images of each presentation related to the first pre-reading presentation.

In this example, when the presentation mode is [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH] (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 or more, time-saving mode a), the number of second reserved memories is 4, and four second reserved displays are displayed. Furthermore, the display result of the reserved memory that is third in the variable order among these four reserved memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win," and when a start winning occurs corresponding to this reserved memory, in the start winning presentation determination process (see Figure 9-38), it is decided to execute the first look-ahead presentation, and the first look-ahead counter is set to 3.

First, as shown in Figure 9-34 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "721") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern combination (in this example, "721") is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] on the image display device 5 (see Figure 9-28).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-34 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead effect, and based on the fact that the value of the first look-ahead counter is set to 2, executes the first look-ahead A effect of the first look-ahead effect, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the number of second hold memories has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-34 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates a "miss" display result (in this example, "772").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading A effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-34 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "772") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading A effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-34 (5), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, fixes and stops the fixed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "772") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it fixes and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "772") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading A effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative symbol (in this example, "7") in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-34 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead effect, and based on the fact that the value of the first look-ahead counter is set to 1, executes the first look-ahead B effect of the first look-ahead effect, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the number of second hold memories has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E toward the active display area 02TM03E by one.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-34 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates a "miss" display result (in this example, "771").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading B effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-34 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "771") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading B effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-35 (9), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "771") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "771") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the first pre-reading B effect of the first pre-reading effect, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-35 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first pre-reading B effect of the first pre-reading effect, which is a pre-reading preview effect, and erases the fixed icon 02TM41 from each of the third decorative symbols (in this example, "7" and "7") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, as the number of second hold memories has reached 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-35 (11), the effect control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates a "small time-saving win" result.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-35 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777"), which indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win," in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displaying a variable display of the small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-35 (13), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, fixes and stops the fixed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it fixes and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

<Second predictive performance>
In this embodiment, the second pre-reading effect can be executed based on the result of the determination at the time of the start winning. The second pre-reading effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that indicates that the display result of the variable display that was the subject of the determination at the time of the start winning is a "small time-saving win" without using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the second pre-reading effect, a second pre-reading image is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the display result of the variable display being predicted will be a "small time-saving win." In this example, the second pre-reading image is an image that includes a portion of an image (in this example, "777") that imitates the combination of third decorative symbols that indicates that the display result when stopped will be a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Below, the image that imitates the third decorative symbol included in this second pre-reading image will be referred to as the "pseudo-third decorative symbol" as appropriate. However, this pseudo-third decorative symbol is a different image from the third decorative symbol, as it does not correspond to the variable display currently in progress.

In this embodiment, the pseudo-third decorative pattern is an image that includes a number pattern and a base pattern, but does not include a light effect display. However, this is not limited to this form, and the pseudo-third decorative pattern may be a decorative pattern that includes at least one of a number pattern, a base pattern, and a light effect display.

In the above embodiment, an example of an image including part of the pseudo-third decorative pattern was shown as the second preview image, but this is not limiting, and other images may also be used as the second preview image.

For example, the second pre-read image may be an image containing the letter "V" or the word "FEVER," which suggests that the display result will be a "small time-saving win." It may also be an image containing an ally character related to the success or victory effects in a super reach.

In this embodiment, the second look-ahead effect is executed in the variable display when the value of the second look-ahead counter, which is set when it is decided to execute the second look-ahead effect during the start winning effect determination process, becomes 1 or 2. However, this is not limited to this form, and the second look-ahead effect may be executed in the variable display when the second look-ahead counter is set to any of the values 1, 2, 3, and 4. The second look-ahead counter will be described in detail later in Figure 9-38.

In this embodiment, when the second preview image is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, the second preview image has a lower display priority than other effect images (such as the third decorative symbol and the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" at the top of the screen). Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the other effect images and the second preview image are being displayed in that order.

However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the second preview image may be configured as an image with a higher display priority (display layer) than other effect images. In this case, by making the second preview image a transparent image, the second image is displayed in front of other effect images, but because the second preview image is transparent, it is possible to view effect images (other effect images, etc.) related to the currently executing variable display.

In this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] and the second pre-reading presentation is executed and the second pre-reading image is displayed on the image display device 5, the visibility of the second pre-reading image changes depending on the display mode (enlarged/reduced display) of the third decorative pattern. When the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the visibility of the second pre-reading image decreases. In other words, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the visibility of the pseudo-third decorative pattern included in the second pre-reading image decreases. Furthermore, when the third decorative pattern is reduced, the visibility of the second pre-reading image increases. In other words, when the third decorative pattern is reduced, the visibility of the pseudo-third decorative pattern included in the second pre-reading image increases.

(Example of the second look-ahead effect)
Figures 9-36 and 9-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of presentation images of each presentation related to the second pre-reading presentation.

In this example, when the presentation mode is [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH] (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 or more, time-saving mode a), the number of second reserved memories is 4, and four second reserved displays are displayed. Furthermore, the display result of the reserved memory that is third in the variable order among these four reserved memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win," and when a start winning occurs corresponding to this reserved memory, in the start winning presentation determination process (see Figure 9-38), it is decided to execute the second look-ahead presentation, and the second look-ahead counter is set to 3.

First, as shown in Figure 9-36 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "721") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern combination (in this example, "721") is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] on the image display device 5 (see Figure 9-28).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-36 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is set to 2, executes the second look-ahead performance and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the number of second hold memories has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-36 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates a "miss" display result (in this example, "415").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead performance, displaying the second look-ahead image 02TM42 across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-36 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "415") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the second preview performance and erases the second preview image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-36 (5), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "415") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "415") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-36 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is set to 1, executes the second look-ahead performance and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the number of second hold memories has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-36 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates a "miss" display result (in this example, "342").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead performance, displaying the second look-ahead image 02TM42 across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-36 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "342") that results in a "miss" display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the second preview performance and erases the second preview image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-37 (9), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "342") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "342") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-37 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol starts in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, as the number of second hold memories has reached 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the normal mode active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the normal mode second hold display 02TM02 that was displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-37 (11), the effect control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in Figure 9-37 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777"), which indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win," in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displaying a variable display of the small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-37 (13), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, active display 02TM03 is erased from active display area 02TM03E.

[Start-up winning effect determination process]
When a start winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits to the performance control CPU 120 the result of the winning judgment, which is whether or not a jackpot will be awarded, and a pattern designation command indicating the result of the jackpot type determination, a variable category command indicating the result of the variable pattern determination, which is the winning judgment, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) specifying that the reserved memory number has increased by one.

Figure 9-38 is a flowchart showing the process for determining the effect when a start win occurs. The effect control CP 120 executes the process for determining the effect when a start win occurs during the advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in Figure 7.

In the start winning effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether a set of start winning commands (e.g., a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a first reserved memory count addition designation command or a second reserved memory count addition designation command) based on the occurrence of a start winning at the start winning slot has been newly received (step S02TM4010).

Specifically, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether a set of symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory count addition designation commands (first reserved memory count addition designation command or second reserved memory count addition designation command) have been newly stored in the start-up winning command storage area. If a set of start-up winning commands has not been newly received (NO in step S02TM4010), the presentation control CPU 120 simply ends the process.

If a new command for a set of start winnings has been received (YES in step S02TM4010), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the display result of the variable display different from the variable display for the start winnings is either a "big win" or a "time-saving small win" (step S02TM4015).

Variable displays that are different from the variable display for the start winning are currently running variable displays and variable displays for reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning. Therefore, in the processing of step S02TM4015, at the time of the start winning, it is determined whether the display result of the currently running variable display or the variable display for reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning is a "big win" or a "small time-saving win."

If the display result of the variable display that differs from the variable display of the initial winning is either a "big win" or a "time-saving small win" (YES in step S02TM4015), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If the display result of the variable display that differs from the variable display of the starting winning is neither a "big win" nor a "small time-saving win" (NO in step S02TM4015), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the change pre-read prohibition flag described below is set (step S02TM4020). If the change pre-read prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4020), the presentation control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4090.

In this embodiment, the change pre-read prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set when it is determined that at least one change effect (pending change effect, active change effect) will be executed. When the change pre-read prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4030 to S02TM4080 is skipped, so that when it has been determined that a change effect will be executed for a pending memory whose execution is pending or a currently executing active display, the execution of a change effect that changes the pending display or active display for a variable display corresponding to a new start winning combination can be restricted. This change pre-read prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display corresponding to the start winning combination combination determination process when the change pre-read prohibition flag was set has ended.

If the change pre-read prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display based on the final display mode determination table for the active display (see Figure 9-39 (A)) (step S02TM4030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (step S02TM4040). If the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4090.

If the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), the performance control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and active display based on the change pattern determination table (see Figures 9-39 (B1) to 9-40 (B4)) (step S02TM4050).

Here, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), that means the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode. If the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode, a change effect is performed on the pending display or active display, and it is displayed in a mode other than the normal mode. In other words, since at least one change effect is executed, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), it is necessary to determine which change pattern to use to change the pending display or active display. Therefore, if the result is NO in step S02TM4040, the change pattern for the pending display and active display is determined in the processing of step S02TM4050 based on the change pattern determination table.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the change effect based on the effect mode determination table for change effects (see Figures 9-41 (1) and (2)) (step S02TM4060).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the change read-ahead counter (described below) (step S02TM4070) and sets the change read-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM1080).

In this embodiment, a look-ahead counter is set that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance is executed. In this example, the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the change performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "change look-ahead counter," the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the first look-ahead performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "first look-ahead counter," and the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of change displays until the change display that is the target of the second look-ahead performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "second look-ahead counter."

If step S02TM4020 is YES, if step S02TM4040 is YES, or after step S02TM4080, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or greater (step S02TM4090). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or greater, that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (step S02TM4090 is NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or greater, i.e., if the jackpot occurrence count value is between 3 and 10,000 (YES in step S02TM4090), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or greater (step S02TM4100). If the value of the second reserved memory count is not 3 or greater (NO in step S02TM4100), i.e., if the value of the second reserved memory count is between 0 and 2, the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or greater (YES in step S02TM4100), i.e., if the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or 4, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the display result specified by the symbol designation command is either a "miss" or a "time-saving small win" (step S02TM4110). If the display result specified by the symbol designation command is neither a "miss" nor a "time-saving small win" (NO in step S02TM4110), i.e., if the display result specified by the symbol designation command is either a "big win" or a "normal small win," the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the first pre-read prohibition flag, described below, is set (step S02TM4120). If the first pre-read prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4120), the presentation control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4170.

In this embodiment, the first pre-read prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set when it is determined that the first pre-read effect will be executed. When the first pre-read prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4130 to S02TM4160 is skipped, so that when it has been determined that the first pre-read effect will be executed for a pending memory whose execution is on hold, the execution of the first pre-read effect can be restricted for a variable display corresponding to a new start winning. This first pre-read prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display corresponding to the start winning effect determination processing when the first pre-read prohibition flag was set has ended.

If the first pre-read prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4120), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first pre-read performance based on the first pre-read performance execution determination table (see Figure 9-39 (B1)) (step S02TM4130).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (step S02TM4140). If it has not decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (NO in step S02TM4140), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4170.

If it has been decided to execute the first look-ahead effect (YES in step S02TM4140), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first look-ahead counter (step S02TM4150), sets the first look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4160), and proceeds to step S02TM4170.

If step S02TM4120 is YES, if step S02TM4140 is NO, or after step S02TM4160, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the second pre-read prohibition flag described below is set (step S02TM4170). If the second pre-read prohibition flag is set (step S02TM4170 is YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends processing.

In this embodiment, the second look-ahead prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set when it is determined that the second look-ahead effect will be executed. When the second look-ahead prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4180 to S02TM4210 is skipped, so that when it has been determined that the second look-ahead effect will be executed for a pending memory whose execution is on hold, the execution of the second look-ahead effect can be restricted for a variable display corresponding to a new start winning. This second look-ahead prohibition flag is cleared when the variable display corresponding to the start winning effect determination processing when the second look-ahead prohibition flag was set has ended.

If the second pre-read prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4170), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second pre-read performance based on the second pre-read performance execution determination table (see Figure 9-39 (B2)) (step S02TM4180).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (step S02TM4190). If it has not decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (NO in step S02TM4190), the performance control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If it has been decided to execute the second look-ahead effect (YES in step S02TM4190), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S02TM4200), sets the second look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4210), and then ends processing.

In this way, in the processing of step S02TM4015, if the display result of a variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is neither a "jackpot" nor a "small time-saving win," the processing to determine whether or not to execute a change effect for the corresponding display (hold display, active display) (steps S02TM4020 to S02TM4080) and the processing to determine whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect or the second look-ahead effect (steps S02TM4090 to S02TM4210) are skipped. This prevents inappropriate effect control from being executed, such as deciding to execute a look-ahead preview effect in a variable display corresponding to a new start winning, when there is a variable display that has already been determined to be a "jackpot" or a "small time-saving win."

[Tables referenced in the start winning performance determination process]
9-39 to 9-42 are specific examples of tables referenced in any of the processes in the start winning effect determination process. FIG. 9-39(A) is an example of a final display mode determination table for the active display referenced when determining the final display mode of the active display in step S02TM4030. FIG. 9-39(B1) to 9-40(B4) are examples of change pattern determination tables referenced when determining the change patterns of the pending display and active display in step S02TM4050. FIG. 9-41 is an example of a change effect effect mode determination table referenced when determining the effect mode of the change effect in step S02TM4060. FIG. 9-42(1) is an example of a first look-ahead effect execution/non-execution determination table referenced when determining whether to execute the first look-ahead effect in step S02TM4130. Figure 9-42 (2) is an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect, which is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading effect in step S02TM4180.

<Active Display Final Display Mode Determination Table>
9-39(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in FIG. 9-39(A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of active display can be determined as one of "normal mode,""bluemode," and "red mode," and a judgment value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in Figure 9-39 (A), if the judgment result at the time of the initial winning is "miss" (i.e., the judgment result specified by the pattern specification command is "miss"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on that initial winning (new pending memory) will be the normal mode (white circle display) 90% of the time, the blue mode (blue circle display) 8% of the time, and the red mode (red circle display) 2% of the time.

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of the initial winning is "jackpot" (i.e., the judgment result specified by the pattern specification command is "jackpot"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on that initial winning (new reserved memory) will be the normal mode 75% of the time, the blue mode 15% of the time, and the red mode 10% of the time.

<Change Pattern Determination Table>
9-39(B1) and (B2), and 9-40(B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of change pattern determination tables for the pending display and the active display. When the number of pending memories reaches n (n: 1 to 4) due to a start winning, (i) the timing when the nth pending display corresponding to that start winning is displayed in the pending display area (the timing of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the pending display corresponding to that start winning shifts to a higher position in the variable ranking in the pending display area (toward the active display area) (when n≧2), and (iii) the timing when the pending display corresponding to that start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to that start winning is displayed), the display information (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on that start winning may be displayed in a manner different from its normal manner.

In the explanations of Figures 9-39 (B1) and (B2) and Figures 9-40 (B3) and (B4), active shift refers to the pending display shifting from the pending display area to the active display area (as a result, the active display corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of the initial winning is displayed).

In this embodiment, a hold change effect can be executed at any of the timings (i) to (iii) described above, in which the display information (hold display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a different manner from its normal manner. In this example, this hold change effect includes (i) an effect in which, at the timing of the start winning, the mode of the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in a different manner from its normal manner, and an effect in which the display mode of the hold display changes at the shift timing of (ii) or (iii). It should be noted that the hold change effect is not limited to this form, and may also include an effect in which the display mode is changed by acting on the hold display (for example, by piercing an arrow into the hold display) during the variable display of a special pattern (the decorative pattern corresponding to it).

Figures 9-39 (B1) and (B2) and Figures 9-40 (B3) and (B4) show the display mode of the display information (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display at each timing (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. In the change patterns shown in the figures, "Normal" indicates the normal mode, which is a white circle display, "Blue" indicates the blue mode, which is a blue circle display, and "Red" indicates the red mode, which is a red circle display.

([For 1 reserved item] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "1," the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one reserved memory shown in Figure 9-39 (B1). A judgment value is assigned to one of change patterns 101 to 105 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the predicted target is displayed in normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the pending display of the predicted target remains in normal mode at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a normal → normal change pattern.

Similarly, change pattern 102 is normal → blue, change pattern 103 is blue → blue, change pattern 104 is blue → red, and change pattern 105 is red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, i.e., "miss," "big hit," or "small hit"), when the final display mode of the determined active display is blue, judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 101 is determined 5% of the time, change pattern 102 is determined 5% of the time, and change pattern 103 is determined 90% of the time.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 10%, change pattern 102 at a rate of 2%, change pattern 103 at a rate of 10%, change pattern 104 at a rate of 8%, and change pattern 105 at a rate of 70%.

([For 2 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "2," the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for two reserved memories shown in Figure 9-39 (B2). A judgment value is assigned to one of change patterns 201 to 208 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 201 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode at the time of the first hold shift, and does not change to normal mode at the time of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, change pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, change pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, change pattern 205 is normal → blue-red, change pattern 206 is blue → blue → red, change pattern 207 is blue → red → red, and change pattern 208 is red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, i.e., "miss," "big hit," or "small hit"), when the final display mode of the determined active display is blue, judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 201 is determined 10%, change pattern 202 5%, change pattern 203 5%, and change pattern 204 80% of the time.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 201 is determined at 10%, change pattern 202 at 2%, change pattern 203 at 2%, change pattern 204 at 10%, change pattern 205 at 1%, change pattern 206 at 8%, change pattern 207 at 8%, and change pattern 208 at 60%.

([For 3 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "3," the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for three reserved memories shown in Figure 9-40 (B3). A judgment value is assigned to one of change patterns 301 to 308 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 301 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode at the time of the first hold shift, remains in normal mode at the time of the second hold shift, and remains in normal mode at the time of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 302 is normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 303 is normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 304 is blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 305 is normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 306 is blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 307 is blue → red → red → red, and change pattern 308 is red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, i.e., "miss," "big hit," or "small hit"), when the final display mode of the determined active display is blue, judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 301 is determined with a probability of 6%, change pattern 302 with a probability of 2%, change pattern 303 with a probability of 2%, and change pattern 304 with a probability of 90%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 301 is determined at a rate of 10%, change pattern 302 at 2%, change pattern 303 at 2%, change pattern 304 at 10%, change pattern 305 at 1%, change pattern 306 at 8%, change pattern 307 at 8%, and change pattern 308 at 60%.

([For 4 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "4," the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for four reserved memories shown in Figure 9-40 (B4). A judgment value is assigned to one of change patterns 401 to 412 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 401 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode without changing at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode without changing at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode without changing at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target remains in normal mode without changing at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 402 is normal → normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 403 is normal → normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 404 is normal → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 405 is blue → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 406 is normal → normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 407 is normal → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 408 is normal → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, change pattern 412 is red → red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, either "miss" or "jackpot"), when the final display mode of the determined active display is blue, the judgment values are assigned so that change pattern 401 is determined at a rate of 10%, change pattern 402 at a rate of 10%, change pattern 403 at a rate of 10%, change pattern 404 at a rate of 10%, and change pattern 405 at a rate of 60%.

Furthermore, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are assigned so that the following proportions are determined: change pattern 401 20%, change pattern 402 5%, change pattern 403 5%, change pattern 404 5%, change pattern 405 20%, change pattern 406 2%, change pattern 407 2%, change pattern 408 2%, change pattern 409 7%, change pattern 410 6%, change pattern 411 6%, and change pattern 412 20%.

<Determination table for change effect presentation mode>
9-41(1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the effect mode determination table for the change effect. As shown in Fig. 9-41(1) and (2), in this embodiment, the determination ratio of the effect mode for the change effect is assigned depending on the change timing in the change pattern.

Figure 9-41 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the change presentation for the [first special symbol].

When the change timing in the change pattern is "normal → blue," it is decided to execute the first change effect 20% of the time, the second change effect 0% of the time, and the third change effect 80% of the time.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → red," it is decided to execute the first change effect 15% of the time, the second change effect 80% of the time, and the third change effect 5% of the time.

When the change timing in the change pattern is "blue → red," it is decided to execute the first change effect 40% of the time, the second change effect 50% of the time, and the third change effect 10% of the time.

Figure 9-41 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the change presentation for the [second special symbol].

If the change timing in the change pattern is "normal → blue," it is determined that the third change effect will be executed with a 100% probability.

If the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → red," it is determined that the third change effect will be executed with a 100% probability.

If the change timing in the change pattern is "blue → red," it is determined that the third change effect will be executed with a 100% probability.

<First look-ahead effect presentation mode determination table>
9-42(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 9-42(1), in this embodiment, a determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio for whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect varies depending on the display result specified by the symbol specification command.

If the display result is a "miss," there is a 90% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and a 10% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

Also, if the display result is a "small time-saving win," there is a 70% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and a 30% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

<Determination table for second look-ahead effect>
9-42(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the second look-ahead effect. As shown in FIG. 9-42(2), in this embodiment, a determination value is assigned so that the determination ratio for whether or not to execute the second look-ahead effect varies depending on the display result specified by the symbol specification command.

If the display result is a "miss," there is a 95% chance that the second look-ahead effect will not be executed, and a 5% chance that the second look-ahead effect will be executed.

Also, if the display result is a "small time-saving win," there is an 80% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and a 20% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

As such, when the display result is a "miss," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Furthermore, when the display result is a "time-saving small win," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, among the look-ahead preview effects, the symbol enlargement effect may be executed at a higher rate than the reserved look-ahead preview effect. Furthermore, the combined execution rate of the first look-ahead effect and the symbol enlargement effect may be higher than the combined execution rate of the second look-ahead effect and the reserved look-ahead preview effect.

[Jackpot count display]
In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the presentation mode during the time-saving state a is switched when the count value of the jackpot occurrence counter (hereinafter referred to as the ``jackpot occurrence count value'' as appropriate) is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (hereinafter referred to as the ``mode switching determination value'' as appropriate).

In this example, the mode switching judgment value is set to "3." When the number of jackpots since the first jackpot is 1 to 2 (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is < mode switching judgment value), the presentation mode for the time-saving state a can be controlled to "Dream Rush." When the number of jackpots since the first jackpot is 3 or more (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is >= mode switching judgment value), the presentation mode for the time-saving state a can be controlled to "Super High-Speed Hyper Rush."

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or less than the mode switching threshold, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period of time. The jackpot count display can not only notify the player of the number of jackpots that have occurred since the first jackpot (jackpot occurrence count value), but also the number of remaining jackpots required until the mode switching threshold is reached (mode switching threshold value - jackpot occurrence count value). Therefore, the jackpot count display can effectively show the player how many remaining jackpots must occur before the game switches to [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], which has a high probability of executing a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation display period (fast fluctuation speed).

In addition, in this embodiment, a required number of jackpots notification effect can be executed to notify the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching threshold without using a jackpot count display during the ending period of the jackpot. The required number of jackpots notification effect displays the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching threshold across the entire screen of the image display device 5. The required number of jackpots display includes the text "n more jackpots until the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (n = 1, 2) (see Figure 9-51 (8) and Figure 9-56 (23)).

In this example, when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count of 1, two more jackpots are required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the required number of jackpots notification effect executed when a jackpot occurrence count of 1 occurs will be referred to as the "required number of jackpots notification effect [2 times]" as appropriate. Also, when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count of 2, one more jackpot is required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the required number of jackpots notification effect executed when a jackpot occurrence count of 2 occurs will be referred to as the "required number of jackpots notification effect [1 time]" as appropriate.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1, 2, or 3), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left or center of the screen of the image display device 5 during a round period in a specific type of jackpot game state (in this example, "10Ra time-saving jackpot," "10Rb time-saving jackpot," or "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot") or during a small jackpot game period in a specific type of small jackpot game state (in this example, "time-saving small jackpot"). Additionally, during the period when the presentation mode in the a time-saving state is controlled to [Dream RUSH] (waiting period for variable display start, variable display period), a jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

The jackpot count display is composed of four sections, from the bottom to the top of the screen: the first count section, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section. The letters "V" and "WIN" are displayed in the first count section, the second count section, and the third count section of the jackpot count display. The letters "PREMIUM FEVER" are displayed in the arrival section of the jackpot count display. Below, the first count section of the jackpot count display will be referred to as the "jackpot count display (first count section)" or the "first count section" as appropriate. The same applies to the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section of the jackpot count display. At least one of the first count section, the second count section, and the third count section of the jackpot count display will be referred to as the "count section" as appropriate.

<Display mode of jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, the display size of the reaching portion of the jackpot count display is larger than that of any of the other count portions. Furthermore, the display size of the third count portion of the jackpot count display is larger than that of the first and second count portions, and the display size of the second count portion is larger than that of the first count portion. That is, the display sizes increase in the order of the first count portion, the second count portion, the third count portion, and the reaching portion. Therefore, the information displayed in the count portion (such as the letter "V" and the letter "WIN") increases in size (highlighted) in the order of the information displayed in the first count portion, the information displayed in the second count portion, and the information displayed in the third count portion. Furthermore, the information displayed in the reaching portion (such as the letter "PREMIUM FEVER") increases in size (highlighted) in the order of the information displayed in any of the count portions (such as the letter "V" and the letter "WIN").

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display was varied by varying the display size, but this is not the only method, and other methods may also be used to vary the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which each section of the jackpot count display can emit light, the degree of emphasis of each section of the jackpot count display can be varied by increasing the luminance of the light in the order of the first count section, second count section, third count section, and reach section.

Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which each section of the jackpot count display can flash, the degree of emphasis of each section of the jackpot count display can be varied by shortening the flashing interval in the order of the first count section, second count section, third count section, and arrival section.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of emphasis was varied by varying the display mode of each part of the jackpot count display, but this is not limited to this form. The degree of emphasis may also be varied by varying the display mode of the entire jackpot count display.

For example, if the transparency of the jackpot count display can be set to any value, when the jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 90%, when the jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 50%, and when the jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 0%.

In this embodiment, the count sections of the jackpot count display (first count section, second count section, third count section) can be displayed in three different display modes: the initial mode, the first change mode, and the second change mode. In this embodiment, the effect that changes the count sections from the initial mode to the first change mode is called a V change effect, and the effect that changes the count sections from the first change mode to the second change mode is called a WIN change effect.

The series of V change effects and WIN change effects executed for the first count section will be referred to as the "first stage effects" as appropriate, the series of V change effects and WIN change effects executed for the second count section will be referred to as the "second stage effects" as appropriate, and the series of V change effects and WIN change effects executed for the third count section will be referred to as the "third stage effects" as appropriate.

When the count section is displayed in its initial state, the information displayed on the count section is the white letter "V." When the count section is displayed in its first variable state, the information displayed on the count section is the red letter "V." When the count section is displayed in its second variable state, the information displayed on the count section is the red letter "WIN."

In this embodiment, when a V-change effect is performed on the count section, the jackpot occurrence display (in this example, the red letter "V" shown in Figure 9-51 (5)) related to the occurrence of a jackpot displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 acts on the white letter "V" displayed on the count section in the initial state, and changes to the red letter "V" displayed on the count section in the first change state.

In addition, the arrival section of the jackpot count display can be displayed in two different display modes: an initial mode and a change mode. In this embodiment, the effect of changing the arrival section from the initial mode to the change mode is referred to as the arrival section change effect.

When the destination is displayed in its initial state, the information displayed in the destination is "PREMIUM FEVER" in white text; when the destination is displayed in its variable state, the information displayed in the destination is "PREMIUM FEVER" in red text.

<[When hitting a jackpot] Timing of the jackpot count display and change>
In this embodiment, if it is decided in the jackpot performance determination process (see Figure 9-43) to display a jackpot count display, the jackpot count display can be displayed in the jackpot game state every time a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1, 2, or 3, and the display mode of each count section corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value is changed in the order of initial mode to first change mode and then second change mode.

In this embodiment, jackpots with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more are jackpots that occur mainly when the machine is in a time-saving mode (time-saving mode a, time-saving mode b) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving mode, the probability of a jackpot occurring when the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than the probability of a jackpot occurring when the display result is a "jackpot," resulting in a "small jackpot via a V prize (see Figure 9-2 (B2)). Therefore, in this example, when explaining the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more, an example of a jackpot occurring when a small jackpot occurs will be used; however, the same applies to a jackpot occurring when the display result is a "jackpot," so an explanation will be omitted.

(1) <When the jackpot count value = 1>
(1-1) During the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the end of the right-hand hit notification of the first round to the end of the second round), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, each count section and the arrival section are both displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 9-51 (5)).

(1-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the elapse of the first predetermined period), a jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the first count section, and the first count section changes from its initial state to the first change state. In addition, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in their initial states (see Figure 9-51 (6)).

(1-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from when the third round begins and the first predetermined period has elapsed until the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed on the first count section, and the first count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. In addition, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in their initial modes (see Figure 9-51 (7)).

(2) <When a jackpot occurs with a jackpot count value of 2>
(2-1) During the small win game period in the small win game state and the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing of V winning in the small win game period to the end of the second round of the jackpot round period), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second changing mode, and the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 9-56 (20)).

(2-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the elapse of the first predetermined period), a jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the second count section, and the second count section changes from its initial state to its first change state. Furthermore, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section both continue to be displayed in their initial states (see Figure 9-56 (21)).

(2-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round when the first predetermined period has elapsed to the second predetermined period when the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed on the second count section, and the second count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. Furthermore, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and the arrival section both continue to be displayed in their initial modes (see Figure 9-56 (22)).

(3) <When the jackpot count value = 3>
(3-1) During the small win game period in the small win game state and the big win round period in the big win game state (in this example, the period from the timing of V winning in the small win game period to the end of the second round of the big win round period), the big win count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section and the second count section are continuously displayed in the second changing mode, and the third count section and the arrival section are both continuously displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 9-59 (11)).

(3-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the elapse of the first predetermined period), a jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the third count section, and the third count section changes from its initial state to its first change state. Furthermore, the first and second count sections continue to be displayed in the second change state, and the arrival section continues to be displayed in its initial state (see Figure 9-59 (12)).

(3-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round when the first predetermined period has elapsed to the second predetermined period when the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a second change effect is executed on the third count section, and the third count section changes from the first change mode to the second change mode. The first and second count sections continue to be displayed in the second change mode, and the arrival section continues to be displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 9-59 (13)).

(3-4) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round after the first and second predetermined periods have elapsed to the third predetermined period), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a reaching portion change effect is executed on the reaching portion, causing the reaching portion to change from its initial state to a changing state. The first, second, and third count portions continue to be displayed in the second changing state (see Figure 9-59 (14)).

<Timing of the jackpot count display during time-saving mode>
In this embodiment, in the time-saving state A, which is controlled after a jackpot occurs and the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this example, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 during the waiting period for the variable display start and the variable display period, based on the jackpot count display flag described below being set (see Figures 9-58 (1) and (2), and Figures 9-61 (1) to (3)).

However, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after a jackpot occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 or 2, even during the variable display period when the jackpot count display flag is set, the jackpot count display is erased from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 and is not displayed while the super reach effect is being executed (see Figures 9-58 (3) and (8), and Figures 9-61 (4) to (7)). If the super reach effect develops, the display result will be a "time-saving small hit" (via a small hit) and an effect will be displayed to notify whether a jackpot will occur or not, or the display result will be a "normal small hit" and an effect will be displayed to notify whether the state will fall back to normal. Information (jackpot count display) that notifies the player of the current number of jackpots (jackpot occurrence count value) has a lower priority than information related to the Super Reach effect that notifies the display results of the currently running variable display (Super Reach effect image), so the jackpot count display is not displayed when the Super Reach effect is progressing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display is not displayed when the super reach effect is being developed, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot count display may also be displayed when the super reach effect is being developed.

<Display mode of the jackpot count display during time-saving mode>
In this embodiment, in the a time-saving state, which is controlled after a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the jackpot count display displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the same display mode as the display mode just before it was erased when it was displayed during the jackpot before being controlled to the a time-saving state.

In this example, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after a jackpot occurs and the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display format as the jackpot count display immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during a jackpot (jackpot count = 1) (the first count section is displayed in the second change format, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section are all displayed in their initial format (see Figure 9-51 (7))).

In addition, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after a jackpot occurs and the jackpot occurrence count value reaches 2, the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display mode as the jackpot count display immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during a jackpot (jackpot count = 2) (the first and second count sections are displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and arrival section are displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 9-56 (22))).

[Jackpot performance determination process]
Fig. 9-43 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-43 in the jackpot effect process (step S176) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command, it determines the effects to be executed during a jackpot (and the effects not to be executed) by the jackpot effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-43.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot in question is a "3R regular jackpot" (step S02TM5010).

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is a "3R regular jackpot" (YES in step S02TM5010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If the jackpot type is not a "3R pattern normal jackpot" (NO in step S02TM5010), that is, if the jackpot type is one of the following jackpot types: a "10Ra pattern time-saving jackpot," a "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot," or a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot," the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM5020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10,000), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 to 3, the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM5030) and sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM5040).

The jackpot count display flag is a type of flag that is set when it is decided that the jackpot count display will be displayed at the start of a jackpot or when a V win occurs during a small jackpot. This jackpot count display flag indicates that the jackpot count display will be displayed in the jackpot game state, small jackpot game state, or time-saving state, and is cleared at the same time that the first flag or second flag described above is cleared (reset).

After processing step S02TM5040, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (step S02TM5050).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (YES in step S02TM5050), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the first stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the first count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5060), decides to execute the presentation announcing the required number of jackpots [2 times] (step S02TM5070), and then ends the processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 1 (NO in step S02TM5050), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (step S02TM5080).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (YES in step S02TM5080), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the second stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the second count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5090), decides to execute the presentation announcing the required number of jackpots [1 time] (step S02TM5100), and then ends the processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 2 (NO in step S02TM5080), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (step S02TM5110). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 (NO in step S02TM5110), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (YES in step S02TM5110), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the third stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the third count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5120), decides to execute the arrival section change presentation (step S02TM5130), and then ends the processing.

[Small hit performance determination process]
Fig. 9-44 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a small win. The effect control CPU 120 executes the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-44 in the small win effect processing (step S174) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a small win start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during the small win (and the effect not to be executed) by the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-44.

In this example, during the small win release process, which is executed when the game is controlled to a small win gaming state, if a V win occurs, the process is executed to update the large win occurrence count value, which is specified numerical data, by adding 1.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the V prize flag is set (step S02TM6010). If the V prize flag is not set (NO in step S02TM6010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM6010), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM6020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10,000), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 to 3 (a jackpot via a small jackpot on the first hit (jackpot occurrence count value = 1) is irregular), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM6030), sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM6040), and ends processing.

[Processing for determining effects when waiting for fluctuation start]
Fig. 9-45 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the variable display start waiting period. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-45 during the variable display start waiting period (step S170) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo command, it determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display start waiting period by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-45.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM7010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM7010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM7010), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM7020) and ends processing.

[Performance decision process at the start of fluctuation]
When the CPU 103 starts displaying the variation of the special pattern, it sends a display result designation command that designates the display result, a variation pattern designation command that designates the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) to the performance control CPU 120.

When the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) begins to change, the effect control CPU 120 receives from the game control microcomputer 00 a set of commands: a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved memory number has been subtracted; a display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot, miss, type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, etc.); and a change pattern designation command that specifies the change time of the special symbol and the effect content (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.). Based on this, the effect control CPU 120 is able to determine that the display of the special symbol will be changed and to specify the change time of the special symbol and the effect content (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol has ended and the display result has been determined, the presentation control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived based on receiving a symbol determination command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Figure 9-46 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed when the variation starts. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in Figure 9-46 during the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in Figure 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set of commands described above in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, it sets an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern based on the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command, and determines the effects to be executed (and the effects not to be executed) during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern using the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in Figure 9-46.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM8010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM8010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM8010), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020).

In this way, this fluctuation start effect determination process determines whether or not the jackpot count display that was determined to be displayed in the fluctuation start waiting effect determination process (see Figure 9-45) should continue to be displayed at the start of fluctuation.

[Fluctuation performance determination processing]
Fig. 9-47 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during the execution period of the variable display. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process during variable display shown in Fig. 9-47 in the effect processing during variable display (step S172) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the execution period of the variable display by the effect determination process during variable display shown in Fig. 9-47.

First, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM9010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM9010), the presentation control CPU 120 ends processing.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM9010), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020) and determines whether the timing has come for the variation pattern to develop into a super reach (step S02TM9030).

The CPU 103 can acquire information regarding the elapsed time of the currently executing variable display during the special symbol variable processing (S112) of the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 5, which includes processing to measure the elapsed time since the special symbol began to vary and processing to determine whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable time corresponding to the variable pattern. Then, in step S02TM9030, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on that information, whether the current variable time is the timing for development into a super reach in the variable pattern.

If it is not time for the variation pattern to develop into a Super Reach (NO in step S02TM9030), the performance control CPU 120 ends the processing.

If it is time for the variation pattern to develop into a Super Reach (YES in step S02TM9030), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display (step S02TM9040) and ends the process.

In this way, this during-variation effect determination process determines whether the jackpot count display decided to be displayed in the variation start waiting effect determination process (see Figure 9-45) should continue to be displayed during variation, or whether it should be erased during variation.

[Example of presentation when the first hit is a "3R regular jackpot"]
An example of the presentation that occurs when the first "3R normal jackpot" occurs while the machine is controlled in [normal mode] will be explained using Figures 9-48 to 9-49.

Figure 9-48 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the first "3R regular jackpot" hit when controlled in [normal mode], and Figure 9-49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image associated with the first "3R regular jackpot" hit when controlled in [normal mode].

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode," a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, resulting in a "jackpot" ("3R symbol normal jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode."

First, as shown in Figure 9-49 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode," the presentation control CPU 120 receives a pattern confirmation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-48), and confirms and stops the combination of confirmed decorative symbols (in this example, "222") that results in a "jackpot" (a 3R normal jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special symbol stop processing (see Figure 9-22).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-49 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in Figure 9-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to "normal mode" and displays the jackpot start image (in this example, the word "FEVER") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-49 (3), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in Figure 9-48), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot round game image on the image display device 5. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, and a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00000") indicating the total number of prize balls awarded.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to win at the second start winning slot or the large winning slot (here, the large winning slot).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-49 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round of play in the jackpot game state (timing T4 shown in Figure 9-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end designation command, displays a jackpot end image (in this example, a total prize ball count display (the letters "TOTAL 00450") showing the total number of prize balls awarded, and an ally character) on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared during the jackpot end process (see Figure 9-23).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-49 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state (timing T5 shown in Figure 9-48), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [normal mode] and displays in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the same as the combination of fixed decorative symbols that was fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "222"). At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "222") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, a background image corresponding to [normal mode] (in this example, a clear background image including the sun and mountains) is displayed as the background image.

[Example of presentation when the first hit is "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving Big Hit"]
An example of the presentation that occurs when the first "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortening Jackpot" occurs while the machine is controlled in [Normal Mode] will be explained using Figures 9-50 to 9-52.

Figure 9-50 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with the first "10Ra time-saving jackpot" when controlled in [normal mode], and Figures 9-51 and 9-52 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images associated with the first "10Ra time-saving jackpot" when controlled in [normal mode].

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, resulting in a "jackpot" ("Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortened Jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush].

First, as shown in Figure 9-51 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode," the presentation control CPU 120 receives a pattern confirmation command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-50), and confirms and stops the confirmed decorative symbol combination (in this example, "555") that results in a "jackpot" (pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "555") is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special symbol stop processing (see Figure 9-22).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-51 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in Figure 9-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to "normal mode" and displays the jackpot start image (in this example, the words "Dream Fever") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-51 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts a round of play (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in Figure 9-48), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as explained in Figure 9-49 (3), and also displays an emphasized right-hit promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that indicates a right hit to enter the jackpot, and the letters and arrow image are more emphasized than in the constant right-hit promotion image.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the jackpot round game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. However, this jackpot round game start image has a lower display priority than the highlighted right hit promotion image. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the highlighted right hit promotion image and the jackpot round game start image are displayed in that order. However, in this example, the display area for the jackpot round game start image and the highlighted right hit promotion image are the same (the entire screen of the image display device 5), so the player can only see the highlighted right hit promotion image.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-51 (4), the effect control CPU 120 erases the highlighted right-hit promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T4 shown in Figure 9-50). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot round play start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This jackpot round play start image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the text "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round play, a jackpot right-hit promotion image that includes the text "Aim for the attacker!!" to enter the jackpot slot and an arrow image indicating a right hit, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-51 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot round game start image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the initial jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in Figure 9-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a jackpot occurrence indication (in this example, a red "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-51 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the jackpot count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V-change presentation on the first count section, changing the first count section from its initial state (white "V") to the first change state (red "V") (timing T6 shown in Figure 9-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 00300") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-51 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the first counting section, changing the first counting section from the first change state (white "V") to the second change state (red "V") (timing T7 shown in Figure 9-50).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 00330").

Next, as shown in Figure 9-51 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T8 shown in Figure 9-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end designation command, executes the required number of jackpots notification presentation, and displays on the entire screen of the image display device 5 the required number of jackpots (the text "2 more jackpots until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-52 (9), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the required number of jackpots notification presentation, erases the required number of jackpots display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays a presentation mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream Rush") on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T9 shown in Figure 9-50).

[Example of presentation when the first hit is a "10Rb time-saving jackpot"]
An example of the presentation when the initial hit of "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [Normal mode], and then when controlled in [Invincible RUSH], a hit of "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" occurs will be explained using Figures 9-53 to 9-56.

Figure 9-53 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related effect when the first "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [Normal Mode], and then when controlled in [Invincible Rush], a jackpot of "10Rb time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" occurs. Figures 9-54 to 9-56 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of related effect images when the first "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [Normal Mode], and then when controlled in [Invincible Rush], a jackpot of "10Rb time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" occurs.

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], a variable display of the first special symbol is executed, which results in a "jackpot" ("Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, the presentation mode is controlled to [Invincible Rush], and during this [Invincible Rush], a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, which results in a "time-saving small jackpot", and a V win occurs during the small jackpot, and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

First, as shown in Figure 9-54 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to "normal mode," the presentation control CPU 120 receives a symbol determination command at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-53), and determines and stops the determined decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") that results in a "jackpot" (pattern 10Rb time-limited jackpot) in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special symbol stop processing (see Figure 9-22).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-54 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in Figure 9-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to "normal mode," executes the first part of the 3000 notification presentation, and displays the words "Dream Fever" across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-54 (3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the second part of the 3000 notification presentation, and while the word "Dream Fever" is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, a cracked image is superimposed across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T3 shown in Figure 9-53). The cracked image has a higher display priority than the word "Dream Fever". Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the cracked image and the word "Dream Fever" are displayed in that order.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-54 (4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the third part of the 3000 notification effect, erases the "Dream Fever" text and crack image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in Figure 9-53).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-54 (5), the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth part of the 3000 notification performance, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the characters "3000" at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in Figure 9-53).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the reel device did not move when the 3000 notification effect was executed, but this is not limited to this configuration; the reel device may also move when the 3000 notification effect is executed. For example, when the fourth part of the 3000 notification effect is executed, the movable body 02TM100 may be moved from the initial position to the maximum effect position.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-54 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the fifth part of the 3000 notification presentation, displaying the words "3000FEVER" across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T6 shown in Figure 9-53).

In this way, in this embodiment, when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, the 3000 notification effect consisting of parts 1 to 5 is executed, thereby announcing that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the first jackpot and 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the next confirmed jackpot.

Next, the contents shown in Figures 9-54 (7) to 9-55 (11) are similar to the contents shown in Figures 9-51 (3) to (7) described above, so explanations will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-55 (12), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes a special notification presentation to notify players that the game will be controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible Rush]) after the jackpot game state ends, displays the words "3000FEVER" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a caption containing the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left corners of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T12 shown in Figure 9-53).

This caption display is the same image as the caption display displayed when the presentation mode is [Invincible Rush], and by displaying the caption display during the jackpot round before control is switched to [Invincible Rush], it is possible to notify players that control will be switched to the b time-saving state ([Invincible Rush]) after the jackpot game state ends.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 4") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 00450").

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-55 (13), when the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state and starts the time-saving b state (timing T13 shown in FIG. 9-53), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [Invincible Rush] and displays a combination of fixed second decorative symbols (in this example, "777") of the same type as the combination of fixed decorative symbols that were fixed and stopped in the immediately preceding variable display in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a promotion image for hitting the right at the start of the time-saving mode in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This promotion image for hitting the right at the start of the time-saving mode includes the words "hit right" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to enter the second start winning slot.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120, based on the control of [Invincible Rush], displays a caption containing the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left corners of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the period when controlled in [Invincible Rush], a prize ball count display (in this example, the words "TOTAL 01500") (corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the immediately preceding jackpot) is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the b time-saving state, which is controlled after a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," the next jackpot is essentially confirmed, so by continuing to display the prize ball count display corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the immediately preceding jackpot even after the jackpot, the special feeling of the b time-saving state is enhanced.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-55 (14), when the CPU 103 begins displaying the variation of the second special symbol, which results in a "miss" display, based on the occurrence of a new start winning at the second start winning slot (timing T14 shown in Figure 9-53), the performance control CPU 120 begins displaying the variation of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 begins displaying the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-55 (15), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T14 shown in Figure 9-53), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, confirms and stops the confirmed second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "142") indicating a "miss" display result in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "142") is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

After this, the variable display is executed m (m≧1) times, and all display results are "misses." Then, as shown in Figure 9-55 (16) and onwards, the display result for the next variable display is "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in Figure 9-55 (16), when the CPU 103 begins displaying the variation of the second special symbol, which results in a "time-saving small win" (timing T16 shown in Figure 9-53), the presentation control CPU 120 begins displaying the variation of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 begins displaying the variation of the small symbol in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-56 (17), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T17 shown in Figure 9-53), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, confirms and stops the confirmed second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, indicating that the display result is a "time-saving small win." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-56 (18), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (timing T18 shown in Figure 9-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start command, displays an emphasized right-hit promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-hit promotion image includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to enter the V winning slot.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the highlighted right-hit promotion image during a jackpot game state is displayed during the jackpot round game period after the jackpot fanfare period has ended, and the highlighted right-hit promotion image during a small jackpot game state is displayed during the small jackpot fanfare period, but this is not limited to this form. The highlighted right-hit promotion image during a jackpot game state may also be displayed during the jackpot fanfare period, and the highlighted right-hit promotion image during a small jackpot game state may also be displayed during the small jackpot fanfare period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-56 (19), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game period (timing T19 shown in FIG. 9-53), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the highlighted right-hit promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a small win game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This small win game start image is an image that includes a small win right-hit promotion image that includes the words "Aim for V!!" to win a V and an arrow image indicating a right hit, as well as an ally character.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-56 (20), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened during small win play, the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during the specified valid period (timing T20 shown in Figure 9-53), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a big win occurrence indication (in this example, the letter "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section in the second changing state, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section in the initial state.

When the CPU 103 ends the small win game state, the small win end processing (see Figure 9-24) updates the big win occurrence count value from 1 to 2.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-56 (21), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win gaming state and starts the big win gaming state (timing T21 shown in Figure 9-53), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V-change presentation for the second count section, changing the second count section from its initial state (white "V") to the first change state (red "V").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 01800") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-56 (22), the effect control CPU 120 executes a WIN change effect on the second counting section, changing the second counting section from the first change state (red "V") to the second change state (red "WIN") (timing T22 shown in Figure 9-53).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 01830").

Next, as shown in Figure 9-56 (23), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T23 shown in Figure 9-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end command, executes the required jackpot count notification presentation, and displays on the entire screen of the image display device 5 the required number of jackpots (the text "One more jackpot until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-56 (24), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the presentation of the required number of jackpots notification, erases the required number of jackpots display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays a presentation mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream Rush") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In this way, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs during the first jackpot, a first-stage effect is executed on the first count section of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and a special notification effect is executed to notify players that they will be controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible Rush]) after the jackpot game state ends. If a [second jackpot] (a 10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot) occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot, a second-stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed on the second count section of the jackpot count display.

By executing a special notification effect on the [first jackpot], it is possible to notify the player that the second stage of the jackpot count display will be executed, i.e., that it is virtually certain that there will be one remaining until the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, giving the player a special feeling about the "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot."

In this way, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, the player will be able to clear more than half (2/3) of the target value (mode switch determination value of 3) on the jackpot count display, making the "10Rb time-saving jackpot" feel more special than other types of jackpots on the first hit.

In the above embodiment, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first jackpot, the first stage effects (V change effects, WIN effects) are executed on the first count section of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and if the [second jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot) occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot, the second stage effects (V change effects, WIN effects) are executed on the second count section of the jackpot count display.

However, it is not limited to this configuration; during the "first jackpot," the first stage effect is executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display, and the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display at a different timing than during the "second jackpot" (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot) that occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot.

As examples of the timing at which the second stage presentation is executed in response to the jackpot count display, (1) to (3) are shown below.
(1) The jackpot round period during the first jackpot (for example, the timing immediately after the first stage performance)
(2) The jackpot ending period during the [first jackpot]. (3) The period controlled to the b time-saving state after the [first jackpot] (for example, the first fluctuation of the b time-saving state).

For example, in the case of (1) above, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first jackpot, during the [first jackpot], the first stage of the effect may be executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display, and then the second stage of the effect may be executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display.

In other words, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, which is controlled to the b time-saving state after a jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed, so even though a "second jackpot" has not actually occurred, at the time of the "first jackpot," the second stage effect may be executed along with the first stage effect on the jackpot count display.

[Example of a presentation when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3]
An example of the presentation when a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" occurs, where the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the game is controlled by [Dream Rush], is explained using Figures 9-57 to 9-59.

Figure 9-57 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" jackpot, where the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and controlled by [Dream Rush]. Figures 9-58 and 9-59 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images associated with a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" jackpot, where the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and controlled by [Dream Rush].

In this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], the display result is a "time-saving small win" ("10Ra time-saving small win via time-saving small win"), and the second special pattern variation display is executed with a variation pattern of "Super Reach A time-saving small win", a V win occurs in the small win, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and in this jackpot gaming state the jackpot occurrence count value becomes 3 (mode switching determination value). Also, the jackpot count display corresponding to the state where the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 is displayed.

First, as shown in Figure 9-58 (1), when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-57), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and second count section in the second changing state, and the third count section and arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-58 (2), at the timing when the ready state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T2 shown in Figure 9-57), the performance control CPU 120 establishes the ready state by statically displaying the first decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the variable small pattern. In other words, the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L where the first decorative pattern is statically displayed, and the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R where the first decorative pattern is statically displayed, continue to display the variable small pattern without statically displaying it.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-58 (3), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a Super Reach (timing T3 shown in Figure 9-57), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a challenge presentation, displaying the words "BOMB Challenge" and an image resembling a rock across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced version of the first decorative pattern variation displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the determination made in the during-variation presentation determination process (see Figure 9-47) that the jackpot count display should be erased.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-58 (4), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, displaying the words "Explode the rock and get the jackpot!!" and an image resembling a rock on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in Figure 9-57).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-58 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, displaying an ally character performing a bomb-throwing action across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in Figure 9-57).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-58 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, displaying an image simulating a bomb explosion across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at timing T6 shown in Figure 9-57).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-58 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a successful presentation of the challenge presentation, and displays an image indicating that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge (in this example, the word "SUCCESS" and the ally character making a peace sign) across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T7 shown in Figure 9-57).

Next, at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed (timing T8 shown in Figure 9-57), the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating a "time-saving small win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, while displaying an image indicating that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge across the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the variable small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-58 (8), at the timing when CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, confirms and stops the confirmed first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, which indicates that the display result is a "small time-saving win." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is confirmed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, the contents shown in Figures 9-59 (9) and (10) are similar to the contents shown in Figures 9-56 (18) and (19) described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-59 (11), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened during small win play, the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during the specified valid period (timing T11 shown in Figure 9-57), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a jackpot occurrence indication (in this example, the letter "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has updated the jackpot occurrence count value from 2 to 3 during the small win termination process (see Figure 9-24), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the words "3 consecutive wins!!" in the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and second count section in the second changing state, and the third count section and arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-59 (12), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win gaming state and starts the big win gaming state (timing T12 shown in Figure 9-57), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V-change presentation for the third count section, changing the third count section from its initial state (white "V") to the first change state (red "V").

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 03300") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-59 (13), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the third count section, changing the third count section from the first change state (red "V") to the second change state (red "WIN") (timing T13 shown in Figure 9-57).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 03330").

Next, as shown in Figure 9-59 (14), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a presentation change for the arrival section, changing the arrival section from its initial state (white letters "PREMIUM FEVER") to its changed state (red letters "PREMIUM FEVER") (timing T14 shown in Figure 9-57). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays two types of ally characters on the left and right sides of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently executed round (in this example, the text "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 03360").

Next, as shown in Figure 9-59 (15), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 (at timing T15 shown in Figure 9-57). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays, across the entire screen of the image display device 5, an reached jackpot display (in this example, the words "PREMIUM FEVER") indicating that the jackpot occurrence count value is greater than or equal to the mode switching determination value (3).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the text "Round 4") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the text "TOTAL 03450").

Next, as shown in Figure 9-56 (16), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T16 shown in Figure 9-57), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot end command, displays the word "READY" across the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" will begin (the "entry fluctuation" will begin).

[Example of a normal small win]
Using Figures 9-60 to 9-62, we will explain an example of the presentation when a small hit of a "normal small hit" occurs when the big hit occurrence count value is 2 and the machine is under control of [Dream Rush], and this small hit does not result in a V win.

Figure 9-60 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect associated with a situation where a "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and control is being exercised under [Dream Rush], and a V prize cannot be awarded for this small hit. Figures 9-61 and 9-62 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images associated with a situation where a "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and control is being exercised under [Dream Rush], and a V prize cannot be awarded for this small hit.

In this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], a variable display of the second special symbol is executed, with the display result being "normal small win" and the variation pattern being "Super Reach B normal small win," and no V win occurs in the small win, so the mode is controlled to the normal state. Also, the jackpot count display corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is displayed.

First, as shown in Figure 9-61 (1), when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in Figure 9-60), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and second count section in the second changing state, and the third count section and arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-61 (2), the performance control CPU 120 displays a fall suggestion display 02TM400 (in this example, an image including a triangular object containing an exclamation mark and the word "WARNING") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T2 shown in Figure 9-60).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-61 (3), at the timing when the ready state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T3 shown in Figure 9-60), the performance control CPU 120 erases the fall suggestion display 02TM400 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and establishes the ready state by statically displaying the first decorative symbol (in this example, "2") in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the variable small symbol. In other words, the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L where the first decorative symbol is statically displayed, and the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R where the first decorative symbol is statically displayed, continue to display the variable small symbol without statically displaying it.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-61 (4), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a Super Reach (timing T4 shown in Figure 9-60), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a fall-inducing presentation, and when a Reach state is established in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, it temporarily stops the special pattern (in this example, the decorative pattern of the word "END") in the pattern display area 5C. At this time, the special pattern is displayed in a highly transparent display mode (for example, 50% transparency), suggesting that it has been temporarily stopped.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the determination made in the during-variation presentation determination process (see Figure 9-47) that the jackpot count display should be erased.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-61 (5), the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "Destroy it!" and an operation prompt display 02TM31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (at timing T5 shown in Figure 9-60).

Next, as shown in Figure 9-61 (6), when the player operates the push button 31B (timing T6 shown in Figure 9-60), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a static special symbol in the symbol display area 5C, indicating that the display result will be a "normal small win." At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display variable small symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-61 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T7 shown in Figure 9-60), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation command, confirms and stops the confirmed first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "2 [END] 2") in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, which indicates that the display result is a "normal small win." At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "222") is confirmed and stopped in small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 9-61 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (timing T8 shown in Figure 9-60), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start command, displays a result image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This result image is an image that includes an indication of the total number of prize balls awarded (in this example, "TOTAL 03000") and an ally character.

In this small win game state, the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 opens in the first opening pattern, which opens once and for an opening time of 0.04 seconds, making it extremely difficult to achieve a V win. In this example, the small win game state ends without a V win occurring.

Next, the content shown in Figure 9-62 (9) is similar to the content shown in Figure 9-49 (5), so explanation will be omitted.

[Fire interval and hold consumption speed]
In this embodiment, a player can operate the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch a game ball from the ball-hitting device and strike it into the game area. When the game ball struck into the game area enters (wins) the start winning slot, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and the random number value is stored as reserved information. Furthermore, a process is executed to predict the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. After the reserved information and the number of reserved memories are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the results of the judgment, such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the predictive judgment.

Therefore, the more game balls that are launched from the ball launching device and hit into the game area per hour, the greater the chances of a game ball entering the starting winning slot, and the greater the chances of a lottery being held to determine whether or not a big win (small win) will occur, providing an even more advantageous gaming environment for players.

However, pachinko machines prohibit the firing of more than 101 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. In other words, it is possible to fire up to 100 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. To maximize the number of game balls that are shot into the play area, a configuration is adopted in which 100 game balls are fired from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. If this configuration is adopted, the interval between game ball launches will be 0.6 seconds per game ball (seconds/ball).

Furthermore, in order to generate a start winning by hitting a game ball into the game area, the game ball must enter a start winning hole. This pachinko game machine is configured with a winning ball device (e.g., a variable winning ball device) that forms a start winning hole (e.g., a second start winning hole) that can be changed between a closed state and an open state, so when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, the following steps (1) to (3) must be taken.
(1) Pass through the passing gate → lottery for normal symbols (2) The display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol win" → the variable winning ball device is opened (3) The ball enters the variable winning ball device that has been opened. Furthermore, (X) the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills and numerous obstacle nails that change the direction and speed of the game ball's flow, and (Y) if the game ball does not enter any of the winning holes, it is taken into the outlet located at the bottom of the game area, so it is virtually impossible for all of the game balls that are launched to clear steps (1) to (3) and enter the starting winning hole.

Therefore, if the launch interval per game ball is 0.6 seconds, taking into account the above-mentioned (X) and (Y) and steps (1) to (4), the interval between game balls entering the starting winning hole (hereinafter referred to as the "winning interval") will be 0.6 + α (α > 0) seconds.

In addition, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved memory of a special pattern (a variable display whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) corresponding to a starting winning that occurred during the period until the currently executed variable display ends, the variable display of the next reserved memory will begin when the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is executed (variable display period) and the pattern determination period corresponding to this variable display have elapsed. Hereinafter, this period, which is the combination of the variable display period and the pattern determination period, until the next reserved memory begins will be referred to as the "reserved consumption period" as appropriate.

<Table showing the relationship between firing interval and hold period>
FIG. 9-63 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between the firing interval and the reserved consumption period in this embodiment. FIG. 9-63 shows the relationship between the firing interval, the winning interval (hereinafter referred to as [Int01] as appropriate), the variable display period, the symbol determination period, and the reserved consumption period (hereinafter referred to as [Int02] as appropriate), and the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02]. In this example, a case is described in which a player operates the ball-launching handle 30, causing 100 game balls to be launched from the ball-launching device over 60 seconds and hit into the right game area, and one of the launched game balls enters the second start winning slot.

((A) When the variable display period is less than 0.2 seconds)
As shown in Figure 9-63 (A), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with an extremely short variable display period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 0.05 seconds) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 0.05 seconds, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 0.55 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01] > [Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (A))
Figure 9-64 is a time chart showing the relationship between the [Int01] winning interval, the [Int02] reserved consumption period, and the number of reserved memories in case (A).

In this example, the value of "α" in the winning interval of 0.6 + α seconds is assumed to be a unique value for each winning interval. For example, the value of α for the winning interval corresponding to the first starting winning shown in Figure 9-64 is 0.5 seconds, and the value of α for the winning interval corresponding to the next starting winning is 1.3 seconds. The same applies to Figures 9-65 and 9-66.

As shown in Figure 9-64, in case (A), i.e., when [Int01] > [Int02], the reserved consumption period (0.55 seconds) is shorter than the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds), so the reserved consumption period ends before a new start winning occurs. Therefore, the second reserved memory count becomes "1" only when a start winning occurs, but is "0" at other times.

((B) When the variable display period is 0.2 seconds)
As shown in Figure 9-63 (B), when a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 0.7 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01] ≦ [Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (B))
Figure 9-65 is a time chart showing the relationship between the [Int01] winning interval, the [Int02] reserved consumption period, and the number of reserved memories in case (B).

As shown in Figure 9-65, in case (B), i.e., when [Int01] ≦ [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is shorter than the reserved consumption period (0.55 seconds), so a new initial winning occurs before the reserved consumption period ends. Therefore, the number of second reserved memories increases over time (the maximum number of second reserved memories is "4").

((C) When the variable display period is greater than 0.2 seconds)
When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period (longer than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 1 second) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6 + α seconds, the variable display period is 1 second, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 1.5 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01] < [Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (C))
Figure 9-66 is a time chart showing the relationship between the [Int01] winning interval, the [Int02] reserved consumption period, and the number of reserved memories in case (C).

As shown in Figure 9-66, in case (C), i.e., when [Int01] < [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is shorter than the reserved consumption period (1.5 seconds), so a new initial winning occurs before the reserved consumption period ends. Therefore, the number of second reserved memories increases over time (the maximum number of second reserved memories is "4").

As shown in Figure 9-64, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with an extremely short period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 0.05 seconds) is primarily selected, a pachinko gaming machine with a fast reserved memory consumption speed can be realized, but since the second reserved memory cannot be accumulated, it is not possible to execute pre-reading preview effects that predict the expected probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending), which results in a decrease in interest in the pre-reading preview effects.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9-66, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period (variable display period: 1 second) is primarily selected, it is possible to accumulate second reserved memory, making it possible to execute pre-execution preview effects in the variable display, etc., but it is not possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes reserved memory, which leads to a decrease in interest in terms of the speed at which reserved memory is consumed.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 9-65, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is primarily selected, it is possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes reserved memory while also storing second reserved memory, making it possible to execute pre-reading preview effects in the variable display before execution, thereby increasing interest in terms of pre-reading preview effects and the speed at which reserved memory is consumed.

In this way, in a pachinko gaming machine capable of firing up to 100 gaming balls from the ball firing device in 60 seconds, by adopting a configuration such as this embodiment where, when controlled in [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], a high rate of execution of the "Ultra-High-Speed Miss" variable display pattern, in which the variable display period is 0.2 seconds and the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds, it is possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes reserved memory while also being able to execute pre-execution prediction effects and the like in the variable display before execution (the variable display whose execution is on hold).

(Effect 02-1)
As shown in Figures 9-15 and 9-16, and Figures 9-18 and 9-19, in the time-saving state, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the rate at which the variable display of the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern, in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds, is executed is higher than the rate at which the variable display of the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern, in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds, is executed when the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the mode switching judgment value (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2).

In addition, as shown in Figures 9-51, 9-55, 9-56, 9-58, and 9-59, the jackpot count display 02TM300, which indicates the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value, and the required number of jackpots ("X more times until ultra-high speed HYPERRUSH") are displayed on the image display device 5.

With this type of gaming machine, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, the variable display period is more likely to be shorter than the specified period (the 0.5-second symbol determination stop period) than when the mode switching determination value has not been reached. This increases the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the time-saving mode, making it even more advantageous for the player. Therefore, when controlled to the time-saving mode, players will be highly interested in how many times they will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and will play with a desire to maintain the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, assuming this type of variable display control is performed, the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots related to the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value are displayed, providing presentation information that is in line with the player's interests and further enhancing the excitement when controlled to the time-saving mode.

(Effect 02-2)
As shown in Figures 9-1 (1) and 9-3 (A1), if the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state is an even number pattern and the control is to be set to a "pattern 3R normal jackpot", then the control is to be set to a low base state without transitioning to a time-saving state after the 3R jackpot game state ends, if the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern other than 7 and the control is to be set to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", then the control is to be set to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", if the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern other than 7, then the control is to be set to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", ...

With this type of gaming machine, there are cases where the machine is not controlled to the time-shortened state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and cases where it is controlled to the time-shortened state, based on the variable display executed when the machine is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, when the machine is controlled to the time-shortened state, there are cases where it is controlled to the time-shortened state a and cases where it is controlled to the time-shortened state b, so the player can be drawn to the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state.

(Effect 02-3)
As shown in Figures 9-51 to 9-52 and Figures 9-54 to 9-56, when the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state becomes an odd number pattern (such as "555" or "777") and the 10R jackpot is controlled based on this, the manner of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display is changed by at least one stage.

With this type of gaming machine, the jackpot occurrence count value is related to the display of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots, so players will pay attention to the display of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots. Since the display of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots changes based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, players can become more interested in the variable display executed in the normal state.

(Effect 02-4)
As shown in Figures 9-54 to 9-56, when a 10R jackpot is controlled based on the display result of the decorative pattern change display executed when controlled in the normal state becoming an odd number 7 ("777"), the manner of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display is changed by one step, and then changed by another step during the next jackpot game state based on the change display executed in the b time-saving state.

With this type of gaming machine, the player's advantage after the jackpot game state ends is associated with the number of stages at which the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display change, further increasing interest in the changes in the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display.

(Effect 02-5)
As shown in Figures 9-54 to 9-56, when the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state becomes an odd number 7 ("777") and the system is controlled to a 10R jackpot, a 3000 notification effect is executed, suggesting that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, including the prize balls for 10 rounds of the first jackpot (1500 balls) and the prize balls for 10 rounds of the next jackpot that are essentially confirmed (1500 balls).

With this type of gaming machine, when the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, it is suggested that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded: 1,500 prize balls awarded in that jackpot gaming state, and 1,500 prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state b, which is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. This increases the player's sense of anticipation before the machine is controlled to the time-saving state b.

(Effect 02-6)
As shown in Figure 9-4 (A1), when the game is controlled to a 10R jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when controlled to the normal state being a line-up of odd numbers of 7 ("pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot"), when the game is controlled to a 3R jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state being a line-up of odd numbers other than 7 ("333" etc.) ("pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot"), the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] is continued after the jackpot game state ends.

With this type of gaming machine, even though the game has been controlled to the b time-saving state, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol prevents the b time-saving state from ending, thereby preventing dissatisfaction among players. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed despite the game being controlled to the b time-saving state, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state based on this, by making it possible to control the game to the b time-saving state, it is possible to ensure the player's anticipation of being controlled to the jackpot game state regardless of the type of special symbol.

(Effect 02-7)
As shown in Figure 9-4 (A1), when the game is controlled to a 10R jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed when controlled to the normal state being "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," when the game is controlled to a 10R jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state being a line-up of odd numbers of 7 (such as "777") ("Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot"), the game is controlled to the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH] which is controlled to the normal state when a normal small jackpot occurs and no V prize is awarded.

With this type of gaming machine, if an irregular situation occurs in which the first special symbol variable display is executed despite the machine being controlled to the b time-saving state, resulting in a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" and the machine being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, by controlling the machine to the a time-saving state, it is possible to ensure the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state regardless of the type of special symbol. Furthermore, by at least not controlling the machine to the b time-saving state when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

(Effect 02-8)
As shown in Figures 9-55 to 9-56, depending on the jackpot occurrence count value, the information displayed in the second count section (the letter "V" and the letter "WIN") is displayed larger and more emphasized in the order of information displayed in the first count section (the letter "V" and the letter "WIN"). Also, depending on the jackpot occurrence count value, it is possible to increase the luminance of the light emitted from the second count section > the first count section, and it is also possible to shorten the blinking interval (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the manner in which the jackpot count display is displayed can indicate the number of times remaining until the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot count display.

(Effect 02-9)
As shown in Figures 9-18 and 9-19, when controlled in the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to execute a variable display of an "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the display result is a "miss" (missing pattern), and the variable display period is shorter than the pattern confirmation stop period of 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 9-19, among the variable displays that are executed when controlled in the time-saving state a [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] and that result in a "miss" display, if the number of pending memories is at least 1, the rate at which the "Ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period when it is controlled in the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (including a jackpot via a small jackpot).

(Effect 02-10)
As shown in Figures 9-15 and 9-16, the fluctuation pattern table that is referenced when controlled in the time-saving state [Dream Rush] a does not contain a random number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)."

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish between the time-saving state "Dream Rush" and "Super High-Speed Hyper Rush" by the difference in the variable display period, allowing players to place emphasis on the consecutive occurrence of jackpot gaming states and to experience the uniqueness of the time-saving state "Super High-Speed Hyper Rush."

(Effect 02-11)
As shown in Figure 9-17 (1), if the display result is "miss" in the first variable display when the time-saving state a [ultra-high speed RUSH] is controlled for the first time, a variable display of the variable pattern "entry variable miss (entry effect + ultra-high speed miss)" with a variable display period of 30.2 seconds is executed.

As shown in Figures 9-18 (1) and 9-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern (30.2 seconds) of the "Entry fluctuation miss (entry effect + super-high speed miss)" has a longer fluctuation display period than any of the fluctuation patterns executed when the display result is "miss" in the fluctuation display when continuously controlled in the time-saving state a [super-high speed RUSH] ("pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds), "super-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds), "Super Reach C miss" (10 seconds), "Super Reach B miss" (20 seconds)).

As shown in Figures 9-7 to 9-10, the fluctuation display for the "entry fluctuation miss (entry effect + ultra-high speed miss)" fluctuation pattern displays accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effects and mode start indication effects.

With this type of gaming machine, the "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds), which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "ultra-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern, can indicate to the player that they have entered the time-saving state a [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-12)
As shown in Figures 9-17 (1), 9-18 (1), and 9-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern of the "missed entry fluctuation" (30.2 seconds) is such that in the first period from the start of fluctuation until 30 seconds have elapsed, an accelerated pseudo fluctuation effect and a mode start suggestion effect are executed, and in the second period from this first period until 0.7 seconds have elapsed, a period for displaying the fluctuation of the decorative pattern (0.2 seconds) and a period for stopping the pattern confirmation (0.5 seconds) are provided to actually notify the display result.

In addition, as shown in Figures 9-28 (2) to (5) and Figures 9-9 (18) to 9-10 (21), the display of the decorative symbols that actually notify the display results during the second period has the same presentation pattern as the "ultra-fast miss" (0.2 seconds) change pattern.

With this type of gaming machine, the "entry fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern indicates to the player that they have entered the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and even though the actual fluctuation display period is not as short as the "ultra-high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, the player can feel that the fluctuation display period has become extremely short since the first fluctuation display upon entering the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-13)
As shown in Figure 9-6, an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed in which the unit pseudo-fluctuation display period is gradually shortened to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds. As shown in Figures 9-7 to 9-10, in the fluctuation pattern of "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds), in the first period from the start of fluctuation until 30 seconds have elapsed, a mode start notification effect is executed after the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed.

This type of gaming machine effectively utilizes the first period from the start of the "missed entry fluctuation" (30.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern until 30 seconds have passed to make the player aware that the fluctuation display period will be shortened when transitioning to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and to notify the player that they will be transitioning to a presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-14)
As shown in Figures 9-34 and 9-35, in the central area of the screen including the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first pre-reading performance is being performed using a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display being performed (a fixed icon including the word "HOLD" is superimposed on a decorative pattern that has not been fixed and stopped).

In addition, as shown in Figures 9-36 and 9-37, a second pre-reading effect is executed to display a second pre-reading image (an image including part of a pseudo-third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result of the stopped display in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 will be a "small time-saving win").

As shown in Figures 9-42 (1) and (2), when the display result is a "miss," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Furthermore, when the display result is a "time-saving small win," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a jackpot via a small jackpot). Furthermore, the first suggestive effect, which is executed with a relatively high probability, is an effect that uses decorative symbols and is executed in a symbol display area that is easy for players to notice, allowing the player to experience the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] while increasing the sense of anticipation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 02-15)
Among the pre-reading notice effects, the symbol enlargement effect has a higher execution rate than the reserved pre-reading notice effect (not shown). Also, the combined execution rate (percentage) of the first pre-reading effect and the symbol enlargement effect is higher than the combined execution rate of the second pre-reading effect and the reserved pre-reading notice effect (not shown). With this gaming machine, the player can experience the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-16)
As shown in Figure 9-28, in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative symbol is different from the manner in which it scrolls up and down on the screen, but rather moves from the back of the screen to the front (the manner in which the third decorative symbol is enlarged and then reduced). When the variable display that becomes a "miss" is executed continuously,
(1) The third decorative pattern is displayed (enlarged) in a manner that is larger in size and has a higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the previously executed variable display,
(2) It is displayed (reduced display) in a smaller size and with a higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that stopped in response to the last executed variable display. (3) It is displayed in the same size and with the same transparency as the third decorative pattern that stopped in response to the last executed variable display (stopped display).

With this type of gaming machine, when variable displays that result in a "miss" are executed consecutively, the period during which the third decorative symbol is displayed within the area the player is focusing on can be extended, and the transparency of the third decorative symbol changes within the area the player is focusing on, giving the player a stronger sense of the high speed of the variable display in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-17)
As shown in Figure 9-28, in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative symbol is different from the manner in which it scrolls up and down on the screen, but is a manner in which it moves from the back of the screen to the front (a manner in which the third decorative symbol is enlarged and then reduced). When the variable display that becomes a "miss" is executed consecutively, the combination of the third decorative symbol is as follows:
In the case of (1) described above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the immediately preceding variable display,
In the case of (2) described above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
In the case of (3) described above, the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
is displayed.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled in time-saving mode a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a jackpot via a small win). Furthermore, at least a portion of the third decorative symbol used in the previously executed "super high-speed miss" variable display is also used in the later executed "super high-speed miss" variable display, thereby providing a sense of speed through the "super high-speed miss" variable display while preventing the player from feeling overwhelmed by the excessive amount of presentation information presented in conjunction with the "super high-speed miss" variable display.

(Effect 02-18)
As shown in Figure 9-28, when the time-saving state [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, the third decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area is composed of a number pattern, a base pattern added to the background side of the number pattern and corresponding to the outline of the number pattern, and a radial light effect display added to the background side of the number pattern and in front of the base pattern and displayed on the entire screen. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 9-26, when the time-saving state [Dream RUSH] is controlled, the first decorative pattern is composed only of a number pattern.

With this type of gaming machine, the decorative symbols are more emphasized in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], making them easier to recognize when the variable display period is short, and highlighting the sense of speed when the decorative symbols are displayed.

(Effect 02-19)
As shown in Figure 9-18 (1), when the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] is in effect and the number of reserved memories is 0, it is possible to select the "pseudo-fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern, which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "ultra-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 9-11, 9-12, and 9-13, when the fluctuation display of the "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern is executed, a uniform-speed pseudo fluctuation effect is executed in which unit pseudo fluctuations (temporary stop and re-fluctuating decorative patterns) are executed four times with a cycle of [period equivalent to fluctuation display 0.2 seconds + period equivalent to pattern confirmation stop 0.5 seconds = 0.7 seconds].

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled by the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," an extremely short variable display period is frequently selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a jackpot via a small win). Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, a variable display with a "pseudo variable miss" variable display pattern with a long variable display period is executed, thereby minimizing situations where a variable display is not being executed, and by making it appear to the player as if multiple variable displays are being executed, the sense of speed in the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is not lost.

(Effect 02-20)
As shown in Figure 9-18 (1), when the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] is in effect and the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the "pseudo-fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other fluctuation patterns.

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to minimize the loss of frequency and sense of speed in the variable display during time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-21)
As shown in Figure 9-15, when the time-saving state [Dream Rush] is being controlled and the number of reserved memories is 0, the "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern is not selected, and the "long fluctuation miss" (10 seconds) fluctuation pattern can be selected.

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to clearly identify the characteristics of the "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern in the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and also to avoid situations where the fluctuation display is not being executed as much as possible, even when controlled in the time-saving mode a [Dream RUSH].

(Effect 02-22)
As shown in Figure 9-27, a first logo periodic change performance that changes the first logo display and a second logo periodic change performance that changes the second logo display can be executed, and the change period in the second logo periodic change performance (0.5 s) is shorter than the change period in the first logo periodic change performance (5 s).

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled by the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a jackpot via a small jackpot). Furthermore, in the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], where the variable display of the "Ultra-High-Speed Miss" variable pattern is likely to be executed, the high frequency of changes in the second logo display emphasizes the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-23)
As shown in Figure 9-27, a first logo cyclic change effect that changes the first logo display and a second logo cyclic change effect that changes the second logo display can be executed, and the light emission pattern changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the first logo display, and the light emission pattern changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display.

With this type of gaming machine, the first logo display can notify that the machine is in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming ball is the right gaming area, while the second logo display can notify that the machine is in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush] and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming ball is the right gaming area.

(Effect 02-24)
When the time-saving state [Dream Rush] is in effect, a first system display can be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning slot. The first system display is a moving image including the words "hit right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning slot, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

In addition, when controlled in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], a second system display can be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotional image for winning the second start winning slot. The second system display is a moving image that includes the words "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning slot, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

The arrow movement period in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the arrow movement period in the first system display is 3 seconds (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the first system display and second system display notify the player of the area into which the gaming ball should be launched, and further emphasize the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-25)
When controlled in the time-saving state [Dream Rush], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed, along with a first rotation corresponding display as a moving image of a round object performing a rotating motion.

In addition, when controlled in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed as a second rotation-compatible display, which is a moving image of a round object performing a rotating motion.

The rotation period of the second rotation-compatible display is set to 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation-compatible display is set to 3 seconds (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the corresponding display (hold display, active display) rotates to let the player know that it is being controlled to the time-saving state a, and when it is controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the time-saving state a [Dream RUSH], further emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period.

(Effect 02-26)
As shown in Figure 9-14, in the time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], when the display result shows a "jackpot" and the variable display of the "direct jackpot" variable pattern is executed, the jackpot round game is started in accordance with the start of the jackpot game state without executing the pattern matching effect.

With this type of gaming machine, when the machine is in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is frequently selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (jackpot via small win). Furthermore, in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to not display the decorative symbols in a static state when the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the flow of play from the variable display to the jackpot gaming state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the jackpot gaming state is emphasized, giving the impression that the machine has been suddenly controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 02-27)
As shown in Figure 9-5, in the time-saving state a [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display that results in a "time-saving small win" is executed, a pattern matching effect is executed, and the combination of third decorative patterns that indicates the display result will be a "time-saving small win" is displayed/confirmed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 9-14, when a variable display is executed in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH] that results in a "jackpot" (not including jackpots via small jackpots), the symbol alignment effect is not executed, and the third decorative symbol combination is not displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled by the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," an extremely short variable display period is frequently selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (including a jackpot via a small jackpot). Furthermore, in the time-saving mode a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display that results in a "time-saving small jackpot" is executed, the third decorative symbol is displayed stationary in the symbol display area, clarifying the flow of the game and directing the player's attention to playing so that the game ball passes through the V-winning area 870. On the other hand, when a variable display that results in a "jackpot" is executed, the third decorative pattern is not statically displayed, so the flow of play from the variable display to the jackpot gaming state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the jackpot gaming state is emphasized, giving the impression that the jackpot gaming state has been suddenly controlled.

(Effect 02-28)
As shown in Figures 9-15 (2) and 9-16 (2), in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush], when the display result is a "jackpot," a variable display of the variable pattern of the "Super Reach A Jackpot" is executed, and based on the display result being a "jackpot," a success effect including a pattern matching effect is executed, and the combination of first decorative patterns indicating that the display result is a "time-saving small hit" is displayed/confirmed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

With this type of gaming machine, the difference between the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush] is made clear by the difference in the decorative symbol display, creating a special feeling when the display result in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush] becomes a "jackpot."

(Effect 02-29)
In both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush], the execution period of the fanfare effect (0.1 seconds) is shorter than the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot pattern (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the period from when the jackpot game state begins until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state can be made even shorter when controlled to the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and when controlled to the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], preventing the player from having to wait the period from when the display result is announced until the prize balls are awarded. In particular, in the time-saving state a [Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH], control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so the special variable prize ball device 7 can be controlled to the open state immediately after the variable display ends, allowing the player to see the entire process from the start of the fluctuation to the transition to the jackpot round game as a single flow.

(Effect 02-30)
The special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is equipped with a light emitting device, and when a jackpot occurs based on the result of the variable display of the second special pattern being a "jackpot" in the time-saving state a [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] or the time-saving state b [invincible RUSH], it is possible to light up the special variable winning ball device 7 at a timing controlled to the jackpot game state (not shown).

When the machine is in the time-saving mode, the second special symbol changes display frequently, and the display result is often judged as a "small win," resulting in a big win. However, when the machine is in the time-saving mode and the display result is judged as a "big win," players are left feeling disappointed that they would have won better in the normal mode.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is judged to be a "jackpot," and information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim for the attacker!!") is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is illuminated to draw the player's attention from the image display device 5 toward the big winning opening, thereby reducing the disappointment felt when a jackpot has occurred due to the display result being judged to be a "jackpot."

(Effect 02-31)
As shown in Figures 9-32 and 9-33, a series of second change effects are executed, which are comprised of: (2A) a change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5; (2B) a maximum movement effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → maximum movement position → initial position; (2C) a character appearance effect in which an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; and (2D) a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) in which a second action effect is executed in which an ally character throws three bombs at a corresponding display (active display, pending display), thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display (normal mode → red mode).

With this type of gaming machine, the second action effect of the second action change effect and the second corresponding display change effect of the second action change effect are executed through coordination between the movable body 02TM100, the image related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (ally character 02TM30B), and the corresponding display (hold display, active display). This increases the excitement when the corresponding display changes compared to when only an effect that simply acts on the corresponding display or an effect that changes the corresponding display is executed.

(Effect 02-32)
As shown in Figures 9-29 to 9-31 and 9-58, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that appears in the super reach A performance (challenge performance) are the same character. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that succeeds in the challenge in the success performance in the challenge performance are the same character. Also, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that appears in the super reach D performance (battle performance) are the same character. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character that defeats the enemy character in the victory performance in the battle performance are the same character (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character displayed on the image display device 5 creates a sense of unity in the series of presentations, and also makes the player realize that the ally character is an important character to the player, leading to the player developing a strong interest in and familiarity with the ally character.

(Effect 02-33)
As shown in Figure 9-41 (1), when the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed, the probability (95%, 90%) that the first or second change effect is executed when the display mode of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to a red mode is higher than the probability (20%) that the first or second change effect is executed when the display mode of the corresponding display changes to a blue mode.

As shown in Figures 9-30 and 9-31, a series of first change effects are executed, consisting of: (1A) a change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5; (1B) an intermediate action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → intermediate action position → initial position; (1C) a character appearance effect in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; and (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) in which a first action effect in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display is executed, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

This type of gaming machine can diversify the effects that change the display mode of the corresponding display, and can create a sense of anticipation for the first action effect to be executed when the movable body 02TM100 moves.

(Effect 02-34)
As shown in Figures 9-30 and 9-31, in the first change effect, a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) is executed, which changes the display mode of the corresponding display by executing a (1D) first action effect. Also, as shown in Figures 9-32 and 9-33, in the second change effect, a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) is executed, which changes the display mode of the corresponding display by executing a (2D) second action effect.

As shown in Figure 9-41 (1), when the display mode of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to red while the first special pattern variable display is being executed, the probability that the second change effect will be executed (50% to 80%) is higher than the probability that the first change effect will be executed (15% to 40%).

This type of gaming machine can diversify the action effects in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, and can also draw attention to the characters that appear in the action effects. Furthermore, by executing an action effect in which a highly visible ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation that the corresponding display will change to a more promising form.

(Effect 02-35)
As shown in Figure 9-30 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the intermediate performance position to the initial position, the first change performance (1C) character appearance performance is executed, and an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-32 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the maximum effect position to the initial position, the second transformation effect (2C) character appearance effect is executed, and an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

This type of gaming machine can emphasize the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B, and the coordination between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B can highlight the dramatic effects of the ally character.

(Effect 02-36)
As shown in Figures 9-30 and 9-31, (1A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, (1B) an intermediate action effect is executed in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate effect position → initial position, (1C) a character appearance effect is executed in which an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) is executed in which a first action effect is executed in which the ally character throws a bomb at the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 9-32 and 9-33, (2A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, (2B) a maximum movement effect is executed in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → maximum movement position → initial position, and (2C) a character appearance effect is executed in which an ally character 02TM30B related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then (2D) a second action effect is executed in which the ally character throws three bombs at the corresponding display, thereby executing a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display.

With this type of gaming machine, the change precursor effect can make the player look forward to the movement of the movable body 02TM100 and the appearance of an ally character. It can also make the player interested in whether the first action effect or the second action effect will be executed.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, (i) a gaming machine equipped with a [Type 1 jackpot] that controls to a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "jackpot," and (ii) a [Type 2 jackpot] that controls to a small jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "small jackpot," making it possible for the gaming medium to enter the V prize area in the V prize device, and controls to a jackpot gaming state based on the gaming medium entering the V prize area. In other words, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is an example of a [Type 1 + Type 2 mixed machine] that has the patterns of [Type 1 jackpot] and [Type 2 jackpot] as the pattern for controlling to a jackpot gaming state (i + ii), but is not limited to this form, and the various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied to gaming machines with different playability.

For example, the effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine with the gameplay characteristics of a [V-type probability variable machine]. A [V-type probability variable machine] is provided with a normal state, which is a low-probability state, and a probability variable state, which is a high-probability state (a gaming state in which probability variable control is executed). In addition, probability variable states are provided as A-type probability variable state and B-type probability variable state. Jackpot types are provided as a "normal jackpot" in which probability variable control is not executed, an "A-type probability variable jackpot" in which A-type probability variable control is executed, and a "B-type probability variable jackpot" in which B-type probability variable control is executed. Different tables are referenced when determining the jackpot type depending on the type of probability variable state.

In the A special state, the next jackpot is guaranteed, but there is a 75% chance that it will be a special jackpot, and a 25% chance that it will be a regular jackpot. On the other hand, in the B special state, the next jackpot is guaranteed, and there is a 100% chance that it will be a special jackpot. For example, in the A special state, there is a 75% chance that it will be a 10R special jackpot, and a 25% chance that it will be a regular jackpot with no payout, while in the B special state, there is a 100% chance that it will be a 10R special jackpot. In other words, in the A time-saving state, the next jackpot is guaranteed, but there is a 75% chance that prize balls will actually be awarded and the time-saving state will continue after the jackpot, while in the B time-saving state, the next jackpot is guaranteed, prize balls will actually be awarded, and the time-saving state will continue after the jackpot.

For example, the following types of jackpots are provided as types of jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state. Each jackpot type differs in content regarding whether or not time-saving control and probability variable control (probability variable control A, probability variable control B) are executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
(X1) "3R normal jackpot" (40%)
Time-saving control is not executed, and probability variable control is not executed either (X2) "10Ra probability variable jackpot" (40%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed (X3) "10Rb probability variable jackpot" (20%)
Time-saving control is executed, and b-variable control is also executed.

a The following types of jackpots are provided as types of jackpots based on the changing display of the second special pattern in the special state.
(Y1) "Normal jackpot without balls" (25%)
Time-saving control is not executed, and probability variable control is not executed either. (Y2) "10Ra probability variable jackpot" (75%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed.

b The following types of jackpots are provided as types of jackpots based on the changing display of the second special pattern in the special state.
(Z1) "10Ra certain jackpot" (100%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a probability variable control is also executed.

In such a V-type gaming machine, the various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display was displayed during a predetermined period in the jackpot game state or the time-saving state, but this is not limited to this form. The jackpot count display may also be displayed during a period different from the predetermined period in the jackpot game state or the time-saving state.

For example, the jackpot count display may be displayed during the fanfare period or ending period of the jackpot game state, or may also be displayed during the period after the game develops into a super reach in the time-saving state.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving state b is controlled, if the display result is a "normal small win", an example is shown in which a variation display of a "high-speed normal small win" variation pattern, which has a presentation mode common to the variation pattern of a "high-speed miss", is executed. However, this is not limited to this form, and when the time-saving state b is controlled, if the display result is a "normal small win", a variation display of a variation pattern with a presentation mode different from the variation pattern of a "high-speed miss" may be executed.

For example, when the display result is a "normal small win" while controlled in the b time-saving state, a "long normal small win" variation pattern may be set. This "long normal small win" variation pattern may have a variation display period of 10,000 ms, and may indicate that a "normal small win" has occurred in the b time-saving state by displaying a special pattern S (a decorative pattern including the letters "SAFE") in the pattern display area 5C of the image display device 5. By indicating that a normal small win has occurred in the b time-saving state, it is possible to give the player a sense of value, as if it were better that the game state in which the normal small win occurred was the b time-saving state rather than the a time-saving state, which would cause the game to fall back to the normal state, and further enhance the sense of exclusivity of the b time-saving state.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which either the first change effect or the second change effect could be used when changing the display mode of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) to blue or red. However, this is not limited to this configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which only either the first change effect or the second change effect can be used when changing the display mode of the corresponding display to blue or red.

For example, when the first change effect is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to blue at a rate of 100%, and when the second change effect is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to red at a rate of 100%. Also, even when the first change effect is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed, and even when the second change effect is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving mode is controlled to the a time-saving mode, if the display result is "normal small hit," an example is shown in which a configuration is made such that a V win is extremely difficult in the small hit gaming state, causing the game to fall back to the normal state without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. However, this is not limited to this form. When the time-saving mode is controlled to the a time-saving mode, if the display result is "normal small hit," a configuration is made such that a V win is easy in the small hit gaming state, and the game may be controlled to the jackpot gaming state and then fall back to the normal state.

For example, even in the case of a "normal small win," the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is configured to open in the second opening pattern, generating a big win and awarding 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls). However, in this case of a "normal small win," the game state is controlled to normal after the big win game state ends. With this configuration, prize balls can be awarded even in the case of a normal small win, reducing the disappointment felt by the player when the game state is controlled to normal after a big win game state.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, 1500 prize balls are awarded on the first hit, and 1500 prize balls are also awarded for jackpots that occur during the b time-saving state. However, this is not limited to this example. If a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, 1500 prize balls are awarded on the first hit, and fewer than 1500 prize balls may be awarded for jackpots that occur during the b time-saving state.

For example, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, 1,500 prize balls will be awarded on the first hit, and 1,000 prize balls will be awarded on any jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state. In this case, a 2500 notification may be executed on the first hit to notify players that a total of 2,500 prize balls (1,500 + 1,000) will be awarded.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases when the display size of the third decorative pattern is the same in the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. In the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect, the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation may increase when the display size of the third decorative pattern is a different display size.

For example, in an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation presentation, the display size of the third decorative pattern may be increased or decreased as the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the "straight big hit" variable pattern is being executed, the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is hidden, while the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displayed. However, this is not limited to this form. When the variable display of the "straight big hit" variable pattern is being executed, the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be hidden, and the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r may also be hidden.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the "ultra-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern was displayed only when controlled to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], but this is not limited to this, and the "ultra-high speed miss" fluctuation pattern may also be displayed when controlled to a presentation mode other than [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern can be displayed when controlled by [Dream Rush]. In this case, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern is selected when controlled by [Dream Rush] will be lower than the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern is selected when controlled by [ultra-fast Hyper Rush].

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern can be executed during a predetermined period when controlled by [Dream Rush], and the display of fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern cannot be executed during a period different from the predetermined period when controlled by [Dream Rush].

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], during the period from fluctuation 1 to 50, it is possible to display fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern, but during the period from fluctuation 51 onwards when controlled by [Dream Rush], it is not possible to display fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern.

(10) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the mode switching determination value was set to 3, but this is not limiting, and the mode switching determination value may be set to a value other than 3.

For example, the mode switching determination value may be set to 5, which is greater than 3, or may be set to 2, which is less than 3.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the fanfare effect execution period (0.1 seconds) was shorter than the jackpot symbol determination period (0.5 seconds) in both cases, whether a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] or based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH]. However, this is not limited to this example, and the fanfare effect execution period may be longer than the jackpot symbol symbol determination period in both cases, whether a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] or based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH].

For example, in both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the display changes executed in the time-saving mode a [Dream Rush], and where a jackpot occurs based on the display changes executed in the time-saving mode a [Super High-Speed Hyper Rush], the period for determining the jackpot symbol is set to 0.5 seconds and the period for the fanfare effect is set to 1.0 seconds, so that the period for the fanfare effect is longer than the period for determining the jackpot symbol.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, if the number of pending memories is at least 1 or more and the display result is determined to be a "miss," the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is approximately 90% (900/997), and the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected is approximately 10% (97/997). This shows an example in which the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is much greater than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected, but this is not limiting, and the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected does not have to be much greater than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected.

For example, when controlled in time-saving state a [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more and the display result is determined to be a "miss," the probability that the "Super-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern will be selected is 25%, and the probability that other fluctuation patterns A to D will be selected is around 20% each, and may be less than 25% (totaling 100%).

The feature 02TM described above includes the following components:

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
a display means (image display device 5),
In the special state (time-shortened state), when the number of times that the game has been controlled to the advantageous state continuously exceeds a predetermined number of times (mode switching judgment value="2" which is 1 less than 3) (when the jackpot occurrence count value is ≥ 3), the rate at which a variable display with a variable display period shorter than a predetermined period (a variable display of an "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds) is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display with a variable display period shorter than a predetermined period (a variable display of an "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern) is executed when the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (mode switching judgment value="2" which is 1 less than 3) (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of displaying on the display means, when the number of times in the special state has not exceeded the predetermined number of times, a specific display (jackpot count display 02TM300, "X more times until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") regarding the number of times to control the advantageous state until the number of times exceeds the predetermined number of times.

With this type of gaming machine, when the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number, the variable display period becomes shorter than the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the predetermined number of times is not exceeded. This increases the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the special state, creating an even more advantageous state for the player. Therefore, when controlled to a special state, players will be highly interested in how many times the advantageous state is controlled, and will play with a desire to maintain the advantageous state. Furthermore, assuming that such variable display control is performed, a specific display is displayed regarding the number of times the advantageous state is controlled until the number of times the advantageous state is continuously controlled exceeds the predetermined number, providing presentation information that is in line with the player's interests and further increasing the excitement when controlled to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine according to means 1,
The special states (time-saving states) include a first special state (a time-saving state) and a second special state (b time-saving state: invincible rush) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state.
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific display result (a combination of decorative symbols that becomes a jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific display results include a first specific display result (a combination of even-numbered symbols), a second specific display result (a combination of odd-numbered symbols excluding 7) different from the first specific display result, and a third specific display result (a combination of 7 symbols) different from both the first specific display result and the second specific display result,
The state control means
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (3R normal jackpot) based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state has become the first specific display result, the game is not controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends (the game is controlled to the low base state without transitioning to the time-saving state after the 3R jackpot game state ends),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (pattern 10Ra time-shortened jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the second specific display result, the game can be controlled to the first special state after the advantageous state ends (the game can be controlled to the a time-shortened state after the 10R jackpot game state ends),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result, the game can be controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state ends (the game can be controlled to the b time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, there are cases where the machine is not controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends, and cases where it is controlled to the special state, based on the variable display executed when controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, when controlled to the special state, there are cases where it is controlled to the first special state and cases where it is controlled to the second special state, so the player can be drawn to the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
A gaming machine according to means 2,
The specific display can be displayed on the display means in the special state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state) and the advantageous state,
The performance execution means
When the number of times is updated, the mode of the specific display can be changed in stages (the jackpot count display 02TM300 can be updated in stages from the first stage to the third stage, and the remaining number of times of "X times left until the super-high speed HYPER RUSH" can be updated),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becomes the second specific display result or the third specific display result (a combination of odd-numbered symbols), the mode of the specific display can be changed by at least a predetermined step (one step) when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot).

With this type of gaming machine, the number of times the game has been controlled to a consecutive advantageous state is related to the appearance of the specific display, which draws the player's attention to the appearance of the specific display. Since the appearance of the specific display changes based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, this increases the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
The gaming machine of means 3,
When the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled in the normal state being the third specific display result (7 symbols aligned), the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time-shortened state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state is higher than when the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled in the normal state being the second specific display result (odd number symbols aligned excluding 7) (in the a time-shortened state, the normal state is controlled when a normal small win occurs and no V win is made, but in the b time-shortened state, the normal state is not controlled even when a normal small win occurs and no V win is made, so the next big win is almost certain).
When the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols aligned), the effect execution means can change the mode of the specific display by more steps than the predetermined steps (updating by one step during a jackpot game state due to 7 symbols aligned, and updating by another step during the next jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time-shortening state).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the player's level of advantage after the advantageous state ends is associated with the number of stages at which the special display changes, further increasing interest in changes in the special display's appearance.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4,
When the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is entered based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols lined up), it is possible to award a predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning at the large prize slot) in the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is entered based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time-shortened state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state, it is possible to award the predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning at the large prize slot) in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of executing an award effect (a 3000 notification effect displaying the letters "3000FEVER") that suggests that the specified gaming value will be awarded multiple times (1500 x 2 times) when controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result.

This type of gaming machine suggests that when the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, the gaming value awarded will include the predetermined gaming value awarded in that advantageous state and the predetermined gaming value awarded in the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state controlled after the advantageous state ends, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation before the machine is controlled to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5,
The variable display means includes a special identification information variable display means (first special pattern display device 4A, second special pattern display device 4B) capable of variable display of special identification information (special pattern), and a decorative identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern),
the ornamental identification information variable display means is capable of variable display of the ornamental identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to variable display of the special identification information;
The special identification information includes a first special identification information (first special design) and a second special identification information (second special design),
When controlled to the normal state, the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information (in the normal state (low base state), the start condition for the first special symbol is more likely to be met than the start condition for the second special symbol),
When controlled to the special state, the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information (in the time-shortened state (high base state), the start condition for the second special symbol is more likely to be met than the start condition for the first special symbol),
When the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols aligned), when the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (3R jackpot game state) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time-shortened state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state becoming the second specific display result (odd number symbols aligned other than 7), it can be controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state ends (it is possible to continue the b time-shortened state (invincible rush)).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine can prevent a situation where a special state is controlled to be reached but the special state ends because the variable display of the first special identification information is executed, thereby avoiding dissatisfaction among players. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special identification information is executed despite the game being controlled to the second special state and the game is controlled to an advantageous state based on this, by making it possible to control to the second special state, it is possible to ensure a sense of anticipation that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 6,
The variable display means includes a special identification information variable display means (first special pattern display device 4A, second special pattern display device 4B) capable of variable display of special identification information (special pattern), and a decorative identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern),
the ornamental identification information variable display means is capable of variable display of the ornamental identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to variable display of the special identification information;
The special identification information includes a first special identification information (first special design) and a second special identification information (second special design),
When controlled to the normal state, the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information (in the normal state (low base state), the start condition for the first special symbol is more likely to be met than the start condition for the second special symbol),
When controlled to the special state, the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be met than the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information (in the time-shortened state (high base state), the start condition for the second special symbol is more likely to be met than the start condition for the first special symbol),
a state control means for controlling the state control to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols lined up), and when the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot game state) based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time-shortened state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state becoming the second specific display result or the third specific display result (7 odd symbols lined up), after the advantageous state ends, the state control means is capable of controlling the state control to the first special state (a time-shortened state: a time-shortened state in which the state control means is controlled to the normal state when a normal small win occurs and no V win occurs) after the advantageous state ends.

With this type of gaming machine, when an irregular situation occurs in which the first special identification information is variable displayed despite the machine being controlled to the second special state, and the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on the second or third specific display result, by making it possible to control the machine to at least the first special state, it is possible to ensure a sense of anticipation that the machine will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information. Furthermore, by preventing the machine from being controlled to at least the second special state when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
The specific display (jackpot count display) can be displayed on the display means in a first emphasis mode (a mode in which only the first count section is emphasized) and a second emphasis mode (a mode in which the first count section and the second count section are emphasized) that is emphasized more than the first emphasis mode (having higher visibility than the first emphasis mode),
If the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (2),
When the number of times does not exceed a first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the first highlighted manner,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the number of times exceeds the first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the second emphasis mode.

With this type of gaming machine, the special display can indicate the number of times remaining until the number of consecutive times controlled to an advantageous state exceeds a predetermined number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the special display.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the special state (time-shortened state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (a losing symbol) different from the specific display result can be executed, and the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds),
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result.

The gaming machine of means 10 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 9,
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a predetermined state (a time-shortened state in the Dream Rush mode) after the advantageous state ends,
The state control means can control the special state (a time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) when the number of times the advantageous state has been continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number (2),
In the predetermined state (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2: in the time-saving state of Dream Rush mode), the special variable display is not executed (the loss fluctuation pattern determination table does not include a random number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-high-speed loss (0.2 seconds)").
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish between predetermined states and special states by the difference in the variable display period, allowing players to place emphasis on the consecutive occurrence of advantageous states and to experience the uniqueness of special states.

The gaming machine of means 11 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 10,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing the performance is provided.
The state control means can control to the special state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000: time-shortened state in ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode) after the end of the advantageous state based on the variable display executed when controlled to the predetermined state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1 to 2: time-shortened state in Dream RUSH mode),
When the variable display means is controlled to the special state based on the variable display executed when it is controlled to the predetermined state, it is capable of executing a special variable display (a variable display of a "break-in variable miss (break-in performance + ultra-high speed miss)" variable pattern with a variable display period longer than that of the special variable display, as a first variable display whose display result becomes the predetermined display result (a losing pattern),
The variable display period of the special variable display is longer than the variable display period (any of the variable patterns of pseudo-variable miss (2.8 seconds), ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds), Super Reach C miss (10 seconds), Super Reach B miss (20 seconds)) of the first variable display in which the display result becomes the predetermined display result (missing pattern), which is executed when the special state is again controlled (when the time-shortening state a of the ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode continues) after the advantageous state based on the variable display executed when controlled in the special state ends,
The effect execution means is capable of executing suggestion effects (acceleration pseudo-variation effect, mode start suggestion effect) that suggest that the game will be controlled to the special state in response to the special variable display (entry variation miss (30.2 seconds)).

With this type of gaming machine, the special variable display, which has a longer variable display period than the special variable display, can indicate to the player that they have entered a special state.

The gaming machine of means 12 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect during a first period (from the start of variation to 30 seconds from the start of variation) of a period including the variable display period of the special variable display (variable display period of 30.2 seconds) and the fixed period from the end of the special variable display to the start of the next variable display (pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds), and is capable of displaying the predetermined display result (losing pattern) in a manner common to the special variable display (variably displaying decorative patterns in a manner common to the variable pattern of an ultra-high speed loss (0.2 seconds)) during a second period (30 seconds from the start of variation to 30.2 seconds from the start of variation (remaining variable display period of 0.2 seconds) + pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) after the first period.

With this type of gaming machine, the special variable display indicates to the player that a special state has been entered, and even though the actual variable display period is not as short as that of the special variable display, the player can feel that the variable display period has become extremely short since the first variable display upon entering the special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 12,
A display means (image display device 5) is provided,
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
The decorative identification information variable display means is
During the variable display period of the decoration identification information, a re-variable display (unit pseudo-variation) can be performed in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed;
In the first period, it is possible to execute multiple re-variable displays (unit pseudo-variations), and it is possible to make the variable display period of the subsequent re-variable displays shorter than the variable display period of the previous re-variable displays (it is possible to execute an accelerated pseudo-variation effect in which the variable display equivalent period is gradually shortened to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds),
The effect execution means notifies the user that a transition to a performance mode corresponding to the special state will occur during the first period (from the start of fluctuation to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) (the mode start notification effect can be executed after the execution of the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the first period can be effectively used to make the player aware that the variable display period will be shortened when a special state is entered, and to notify the player that a transition to a presentation mode corresponding to the special state will occur.

The gaming machine of means 14 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A reserved storage means (RAM 102) for storing information on variable displays that are not being executed as reserved storage;
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes a jackpot determination at the time of starting winning) that determines whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
a display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the special state (time-shortened state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (a losing symbol) different from the specific display result can be executed, and the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds),
Among the variable displays that are executed when controlled to the special state and whose display result becomes the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and higher than the total of the selection rates of all other variable patterns),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area (a central area of the screen including the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) and a second display area (an area on the edge of the screen excluding the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) that is closer to the periphery of the screen than the first display area and is narrower than the first display area;
The effect execution means is capable of executing, on the display means, a suggestion effect (a first look-ahead effect, a second look-ahead effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, with the reserved memory as the target, during a variable display prior to the reserved memory;
The suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (a first pre-reading effect in which a fixed icon including the word "HOLD" is superimposed on a decorative pattern that has not been fixed and stopped) that is executed in the first display area and uses decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display being executed, and a second suggestive effect (a second pre-reading effect in which a second pre-reading image including an image of seven patterns aligned) that is different from the first suggestive effect and that is executed in the second display area,
The execution rate of the first suggestive effect is higher than the execution rate of the second suggestive effect (the execution rate of the first pre-reading effect is higher than the execution rate of the second pre-reading effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result during the period controlled to the special state is a predetermined display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, the first suggestive effect, which is executed with a relatively high probability, is an effect that uses decorative identification information and is executed in the first display area, which is easily noticed by the player, allowing the player to realize how short the variable display period in the special state is, while also increasing the player's sense of anticipation of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 15 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 14,
There are multiple types of the first suggestion effect (first pre-reading effect, giant pattern effect), and there are multiple types of the second suggestion effect (second pre-reading effect, reserved pre-reading effect),
A gaming machine characterized in that the total execution rate of all types of the first suggestive effects (execution rate of the first look-ahead effect + execution rate of the symbol enlargement effect) is higher than the total execution rate of all types of the second suggestive effects (execution rate of the second look-ahead effect + execution rate of the reserved look-ahead effect), or the execution rate of any type of first suggestive effect (execution rate of the first look-ahead effect) is higher than the execution rate of any type of second suggestive effect (execution rate of the second look-ahead effect, execution rate of the reserved look-ahead effect).

This type of gaming machine allows players to experience the shortness of the variable display period in special states.

The gaming machine of means 16 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 14 or 15,
In the special state (a time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode),
The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative design) is different from the manner in which the decoration identification information scrolls up and down on the screen, and is a manner in which the decoration identification information moves from the back of the screen to the front (a manner in which the decorative design expands rapidly),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result (losing pattern) are executed consecutively, decorative identification information corresponding to a subsequent variable display is displayed in a manner that is larger in size and more transparent than the decorative identification information stopped in correspondence with the previous variable display, and then the size of the decorative identification information becomes smaller.

With this type of gaming machine, when variable displays that result in a predetermined display result are executed consecutively, the period during which the decorative identification information is displayed within the range that the player is focusing on can be extended, and the transparency of the decorative identification information changes within the range that the player is focusing on, giving a stronger sense of the high speed of the variable display in special states.

The gaming machine of means 17 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
a display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the special state (time-shortened state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (a losing symbol) different from the specific display result can be executed, and the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol fixed period of 0.5 seconds),
Among the variable displays that are executed when controlled to the special state and whose display result becomes the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and higher than the total of the selection rates of all other variable patterns),
When the special variable display is executed continuously (when the "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is continuous), it is possible to execute the special variable display using the decoration identification information used for the previous special variable display and the decoration identification information that results in the display of the special variable display (the combination of decorative symbols that was confirmed and stopped in the previous ultra-high speed miss variation temporarily expands and becomes more transparent when the subsequent ultra-high speed miss variation begins, and then, when the combination of decorative symbols shrinks, the combination of decorative symbols changes to the combination of decorative symbols that was confirmed and stopped in the ultra-high speed miss variation).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, if the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is likely to be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, the decoration identification information used for a previously executed special variable display is also used for a later executed special variable display, giving the player a sense of speed while preventing the player from feeling overwhelmed by the excessive amount of presentation information presented in conjunction with the special variable display.

The gaming machine of means 18 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 17,
When the effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), it is capable of displaying, in response to the stopped decorative identification information (decorative pattern), first additional information (in the third decorative pattern, a base pattern that is added to the background side of the number pattern and corresponds to the outline of the number pattern) that is added to the background side of the decorative identification information, and second additional information (in the third decorative pattern, a radial light effect display that is added to the background side of the number pattern and in front of the base pattern and is displayed on the entire screen) that emphasizes the decorative identification information and is displayed outside the area of the first additional information,
When the game is controlled to a predetermined state (time-saving state a in Dream Rush mode) different from the special state, at least the second additional information is not displayed in response to the stopped decoration identification information (either the base design and the light effect display are not displayed, or the base design is displayed while the light effect display is not displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the decorative identification information is more emphasized in special states, making it easier to recognize the decorative identification information when the variable display period is short, and also highlighting the sense of speed when the decorative identification information is variably displayed.

The gaming machine of means 19 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A reserve memory means (RAM 102) for storing the number of variable displays for which the start condition (entry into the start winning slot) has been met but the start condition (the variable display of the special symbol has not been executed and the game is not controlled to either the big win game state or the small win game state) has not been met as the reserve memory number;
a display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the device is controlled to the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) and the reserved memory number is not 0, the display result is a predetermined display result (a losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period of 0.5 seconds for the pattern) can be executed;
Among the variable displays that are controlled to the special state and are executed when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and whose display result is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total of the selection rates of all other variable patterns),
When the device is controlled to the special state and the number of reserved memories is 0, a special variable display having a longer variable display period than the special variable display can be executed as a variable display whose display result becomes the predetermined display result (when the number of reserved memories is 0, it is possible to select a "pseudo variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variable pattern whose variable display period is longer than the "ultra-high speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern),
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the special variable display, it is possible to perform special control (constant speed pseudo-variable presentation) in which variable display of decorative identification information (temporary stopping and re-variation of decorative patterns) is performed multiple times, with the variable display period being the same as the variable display period of the decorative identification information when the special variable display is executed (a period of [variable display equivalent period 0.2 seconds + pattern confirmation stop equivalent period 0.5 seconds = 0.7 seconds]).

With this type of gaming machine, if the display result during the period controlled to the special state is a predetermined display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, a special variable display with a long variable display period is executed, thereby avoiding situations where no variable display is being executed as much as possible, and by making it appear to the player as if multiple special variable displays are being executed, the sense of speed in the special state is not lost.

The gaming machine of means 20 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 19,
Of the variable displays whose display result becomes the predetermined display result and which are executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 under the control of the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the special variable display is executed at the highest rate (when the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the "pseudo-variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variation patterns).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to minimize the loss of frequency and speed in the variable display during special states.

The gaming machine of means 21 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 19 or 20,
When the game is controlled to a predetermined state (time-saving state a in Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state and the number of reserved memories is 0, the special control is not executed, and a predetermined variable display having a variable display period longer than the special variable display can be executed (the "pseudo variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variable pattern is not selected, and the "long variable miss (10 seconds)" variable pattern can be selected).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to clearly identify the characteristics of the special variable display in a special state, and to avoid situations where the variable display is not being executed as much as possible, even when controlled to a specified state.

The gaming machine of means 22 is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
a display means (image display device 5),
The special states include a first special state (a time-saving state in the Dream Rush mode) and a second special state (a time-saving state in the ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (jackpot pattern), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled to the second special state, a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns),
the proportion of the variable display period during which the display result when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result and is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second) is higher than the proportion of the variable display period during which the display result when controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result and is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second);
The performance execution means
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display (first logo display) that notifies the driver that the vehicle is controlled to the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change effect (first logo periodic change effect) that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display (second logo display) that notifies the driver that the vehicle is controlled to the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change effect (a second logo periodic change effect) that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
The cycle in which the appearance of the second special display changes in the second specific change effect is shorter than the cycle in which the appearance of the first special display changes in the first specific change effect (the cycle in which the appearance of the second logo change effect changes (0.5 seconds) is shorter than the cycle in which the appearance of the first logo change effect changes (5 seconds)).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, in the second special state, where the special variable display is executed with a high probability, the cycle in which the second special display changes appearance is short, emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state.

The gaming machine of means 23 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 22,
A game area (2) from which a game medium is shot is provided,
The gaming area includes a first gaming area (left gaming area) and a second gaming area (right gaming area),
When controlled in the normal state (low base state), it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game medium into the first game area than into the second game area (the conditions for starting the special symbol variable display are more likely to be met),
When the special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) is controlled, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game medium into the second game area than into the first game area (the conditions for starting the special symbol variable display are more likely to be met),
In the first specific change performance, the state of the first special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the light emission state changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the first logo display),
In the second specific change presentation, the state of the second special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the light emission state changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the first special display can notify the player that the machine is in the first special state and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming medium ball is the second gaming area, and the second special display can notify the player that the machine is in the second special state and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming medium is the second gaming area.

The gaming machine of means 24 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 22 or 23,
A game area (2) from which a game medium is shot is provided,
The gaming area includes a first gaming area (left gaming area) and a second gaming area (right gaming area),
When controlled to the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state), an instruction display (a first system display and a second system display including the characters "right hit" and a right-facing arrow) instructing to launch the game medium into the second game area can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
The mode of the instruction display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the right-pointing arrow periodically moves from left to right),
The rate of change of the mode of the instruction display in the second special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is greater than the rate of change of the mode of the instruction display in the first special state (time-saving state a of the DREAM RUSH mode) (the movement period of the arrow in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the movement period of the arrow in the first system display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the instruction display notifies the player of the area into which the gaming medium should be fired, and further emphasizes the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state.

The gaming machine of means 25 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 22 to 24,
a storage means (RAM 102) for storing information (holding information) about a variable display for which the starting condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and information about a variable display for which the start condition is satisfied (information about the variable display being executed);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing the performance,
The performance execution means
A corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
When controlled in the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state), it is possible to rotate the corresponding display,
When controlled in the second special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the rotation speed of the corresponding display is faster than when controlled in the first special state (time-saving state a in the DREAM RUSH mode) (the rotation period of the second rotation corresponding display is 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation corresponding display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the corresponding display rotates to let the player know that it is being controlled to a special state, and when it is controlled to the second special state, the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the first special state, further emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period.

The gaming machine of means 26 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing the performance,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result becomes a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns),
The performance execution means
When a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed so that the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decorative identification information (a "symbol matching effect" can be executed in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed when common decorative symbols are aligned),
In the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to prevent the decorative identification information from being displayed statically (in the case of a symbol jackpot, it is possible to start the round display accompanying the start of the jackpot game state without executing the "symbol matching effect").
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, in the special state, it is possible to not freeze the decorative identification information when controlled to an advantageous state, so the flow of play from the variable display to the advantageous state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the advantageous state is emphasized, giving the impression that the advantageous state has been suddenly controlled.

The gaming machine of means 27 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling between a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-shortened state): a time-shortened state, b time-shortened state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
Variable display means (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing the performance,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (jackpot symbol), it can be controlled to the advantageous state,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of the special pattern) becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it can be controlled to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) when controlled to the special state,
When controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result becomes a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result, which are executed when controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when at least the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns),
The performance execution means
When a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed so that the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decorative identification information (a "symbol matching effect" can be executed in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed when common decorative symbols are aligned),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the special state (time-saving state a in ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the special display result (small win symbol), it is possible to statically display decorative identification information (in the case of a jackpot via a small win, it is possible to execute a "symbol alignment effect"), and when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to not statically display decorative identification information (in the case of a symbol jackpot, it is possible to start a round display accompanying the start of the jackpot game state without executing a "symbol alignment effect").

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is frequently selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Furthermore, in the special state, when a variable display that results in a special display result is executed, the decorative identification information is frozen, clarifying the flow of the game and directing the player's attention to playing so that the gaming medium passes through the specific area. On the other hand, when a variable display that results in a specific display result is executed, the decorative identification information is not frozen, thereby not interrupting the flow of the game from the variable display to the advantageous state, and emphasizing the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the advantageous state, giving the impression that the advantageous state has been suddenly achieved.

The gaming machine of means 28 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 26 or 27,
The state control means can control the special state (the "a" time-saving state of the "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode") to a predetermined state (the "a" time-saving state of the "Dream RUSH mode") different from the special state (the "a" time-saving state of the "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode"),
In the predetermined state, when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed so that the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), the decorative identification information can be displayed in a static state (a "symbol matching effect" can be executed when a symbol jackpot occurs).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the difference between the predetermined state and the special state can be clearly distinguished by the difference in the display of the decorative identification information, creating a sense of exclusivity when the display result in the special state becomes a specific display result.

The gaming machine of means 29 comprises:
29. The gaming machine according to claim 28,
The device is provided with a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state,
The execution rate of a variable display executed in the special state (time-shortening state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) in which the display result is the predetermined display result (a losing symbol) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds) is higher than the execution rate of a variable display executed in the predetermined state (time-shortening state a of the DREAM RUSH mode) in which the display result is the predetermined display result (a losing symbol) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period,
After the start effect corresponding to the start of the advantageous state ends, the special variable means is controlled to the second state (after the fanfare effect ends, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened),
When the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the predetermined state, and when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the special state, the execution period of the start effect is shorter than the determination period of the specific display result (when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a of the Dream Rush mode, and when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush mode, in either case, the execution period of the fanfare effect is shorter than the determination period of the jackpot symbol).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the period from when the advantageous state begins until the special variable means is controlled to the second state can be made even shorter when controlled to a predetermined state and when controlled to a special state, preventing the player from having to wait the period from when the display result is notified until the game value is awarded. In particular, in the special state, control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so the special variable means can be controlled to the second state immediately after the variable display ends, allowing the player to see a continuous flow from when the variable display begins until the game value is awarded in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 30 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 26 to 29,
a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first state;
A special light emitting means (a light emitting device provided around the special variable winning ball device 7 or on the opening and closing part) is provided corresponding to the position of the special variable means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it can be controlled to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) when controlled to the special state,
When controlled to the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state), the frequency of being controlled to the special state is higher than when controlled to the normal state (low base state),
The performance execution means
When controlled in the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the special light-emitting means is caused to emit light (the light-emitting device of the special variable winning ball device 7 is caused to emit light) when the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result (when a symbol jackpot occurs), and when the advantageous state is controlled based on the gaming medium passing through the specific area while controlled in the special state (when a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs), and when the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result, in response to the special variable means being controlled in the second state, an instruction display (an indication of "Aim at the attacker!!") instructing the special variable means to fire the gaming medium can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5).

With this type of gaming machine, when controlled to a special state, the special light-emitting means will light up and the instruction display will be displayed in either the case where the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on a special state or the case where the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that they have been controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result. In other words, even though the machine has been controlled to a special state and is in a situation where it is easy to be controlled to an advantageous state via a special state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed that an advantageous state based on a specific display result, which can occur with the same probability even in a normal state, has occurred.

The gaming machine of means 31 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 30,
Movable parts (movable body 02TM100),
Display means (image display device 5);
A storage means (RAM 102) for storing information relating to variable display;
a determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
Corresponding information corresponding to the variable display (a reserved display corresponding to an unexecuted variable display (reserved memory), an active display corresponding to an executed variable display) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
The display modes of the corresponding display include a first mode (normal mode) and a second mode (red mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode,
The performance execution means
A state change effect can be executed to change the corresponding display from the first state to the second state based on the determination result of the determination means,
It is possible to execute a movable role effect (maximum movement effect) that moves the movable role object from a first position (initial position) to a second position (maximum performance position),
After the movable role performance is performed, in response to the movable role being moved from the second position to the first position, a related display (the same ally character 02TM30B as the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the movable role can be displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is capable of executing an action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display (a second action change effect in which the ally character 02TM30C throws three bombs at the pending display or active display), and also executing a state change effect targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the action effect (a second corresponding display change effect in which the pending display or active display that is hit by the bomb changes from a normal state to a red state).

With this type of gaming machine, the action effects and state change effects are executed through coordination between the movable role device, the related display associated with the movable role device, and the corresponding display, thereby increasing the excitement when the corresponding display changes compared to when only effects that act on the corresponding display or effects that change the corresponding display are executed.

The gaming machine of means 32 is
A gaming machine according to means 31,
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) has a shape that imitates a specific character (ally character),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the specific character,
The performance execution means
A battle presentation in which the specific character battles (a battle presentation in which a friendly character battles an enemy character) can be executed on the display means (image display device 5),
When the battle presentation is executed, a victory presentation in which the specific character wins (a victory presentation in which a friendly character wins against an enemy character) can be executed when the advantageous state is achieved.

With this type of gaming machine, the relationship between the movable device and the specific character displayed on the display means can create a sense of unity in the series of presentations, and can also make the player realize that the specific character is an important character, leading to the player developing a strong interest in and familiarity with the specific character.

The gaming machine of means 33 comprises:
A gaming machine according to means 31 or 32,
As a display mode of the corresponding display (hold display, active display), there is a predetermined mode (blue mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode (normal mode) and a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second mode (red mode),
The effect execution means is capable of executing, as the effect change effect, a first effect change effect (a change from a normal effect to a blue effect) in which the corresponding display is changed from the first effect to the predetermined effect, and a second effect change effect (a change from a normal effect to a red effect) in which the corresponding display is changed from the first effect to the second effect,
When the second aspect change effect is executed, the rate at which the action effect (the first action effect or the second action effect in which an ally character throws a bomb toward a pending display or an active display) targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the second aspect change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the action effect targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the first aspect change effect is executed when the first aspect change effect is executed;
The performance execution means
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) can be moved from the first position (initial position) to a predetermined position (intermediate performance position) between the first position and the second position (maximum performance position),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to display the related display (ally character 02TM30B) in response to moving the movable role object from the predetermined position to the first position, to execute the action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display, and to execute the first state change effect targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the action effect.

This type of gaming machine allows for a variety of different behavioral changes, and creates anticipation for the action that will occur when the movable device operates.

The gaming machine of means 34 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 33,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing, as the effect, a first effect (a first effect in which an ally character throws one bomb toward a pending display or an active display) and a second effect (a second effect in which an ally character throws three bombs toward a pending display or an active display) that is more visible than the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second mode change effect is executed, the rate at which the second action effect is executed targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the second mode change effect is higher than the rate at which the second action effect is executed targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the first mode change effect is executed when the first mode change effect is executed.

This type of gaming machine can diversify action effects and draw attention to the characters that appear in the action effects. Furthermore, by executing highly visible action effects, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation as the corresponding display changes to a more promising form.

The gaming machine of means 35 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 34,
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) has a shape imitating the face of the specific character (the ally character of the movable body 02TM100),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the face of the specific character,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of continuously displaying the related display (ally character 02TM30B) on the display means (image display device 5) after the movable role performance is executed, when the movable role is moving from the second position (maximum performance position) to the first position (initial position) and when the movable role has moved to the first position (initial position).

This type of gaming machine can emphasize the relationship between the movable reels and related displays, and by linking the movable reels and related displays, it is possible to highlight the dramatic effects of specific characters.

The gaming machine of means 36 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 35,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
As the action effect, a first action effect (an effect in which an ally character throws one bomb toward the pending display or the active display) and a second action effect (an effect in which an ally character throws three bombs toward the pending display or the active display) that is more visible than the first action effect can be executed,
After executing a suggestion effect (a change precursor effect) that suggests that the action effect will be executed, the movable role effect (intermediate action effect) is executed, and the first action effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that, after executing the suggestive performance, the movable role performance (maximum movement performance) is executed, and the second action performance is executed.

With this type of gaming machine, the suggestive effects can make the player anticipate the movement of the movable device and the appearance of a specific character. It can also make the player curious as to whether the first or second action effect will be executed.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can perform variable display based on the establishment of a start condition and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a state control means capable of controlling the game to a normal state, the advantageous state, and a special state which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state;
A performance execution means;
a display means;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state in which the frequency at which the start condition is satisfied per unit time differs from that of the first special state,
the second special state has a higher frequency per unit time at which the start condition is satisfied than the normal state;
The effect identification information can be displayed on the display means,
When controlled to the second special state, a special variable display can be executed with a variable display period shorter than a pause period from the end of the variable display of the effect identification information to the start of the variable display of the next effect identification information,
The performance execution means
A display corresponding to the variable display, the display being capable of periodically changing in appearance, can be displayed on the display means;
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change performance that changes the state of the first special display in a predetermined direction can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change performance that changes the state of the second special display toward the predetermined direction can be executed,
The cycle at which the manner of the corresponding display changes can be made different when the vehicle is controlled to the first special state and when the vehicle is controlled to the second special state,
The period in which the state of the second special display in the second specific change performance changes can be made shorter than the period in which the state of the first special display in the first specific change performance changes,
The performance execution means
As the corresponding display, a plurality of types of corresponding displays can be displayed on the display means, including a first corresponding display, a second corresponding display that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first corresponding display, and a third corresponding display that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first corresponding display and the second corresponding display,
a change effect execution means for executing a change effect in which the corresponding display is displayed as the second corresponding display or the third corresponding display ;
The change effect execution means
As the change effect, a first change effect that is executed with a specific action effect that acts on the corresponding display, and a second change effect that is executed without the specific action effect can be executed,
When controlled to the normal state, the first change performance and the second change performance can be executed,
When controlled to the second special state, the second change performance can be executed without executing the first change performance,
When controlled to the second special state, the second change performance can be executed in a period from before a change display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the change performance is started to immediately after the change display is started,
When controlled to the second special state, the second change performance can be executed in a later period that is immediately after the start of a variable display corresponding to the corresponding display that is the target of the change performance,
When controlled in the second special state, the second change performance can be executed at a higher rate in the previous period than in the subsequent period,
The change performance can be executed in any one of a first change pattern, a second change pattern, and a third change pattern,
The first change pattern is a pattern in which the change performance is not performed in the previous period and the change performance is performed in the later period,
The second change pattern is a pattern in which the change performance is executed in the previous period and the change performance is not executed in the later period,
The third change pattern is a pattern in which the change performance is executed in both the previous period and the subsequent period,
A gaming machine in which, when the final display mode of the corresponding display is the third corresponding display, the rate at which the third change pattern is executed is higher than the rate at which the first change pattern or the second change pattern is executed .